You are on page 1of 354

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and

not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

This document is intended to assist a TURBOMECA-qualified instructor in teaching


basic information related to the operation and maintenance of the ARRIEL 1
turboshaft engines.
It is a training aid and should only be used to support the training course to which
it refers, and only by a person attending such training. It must not be used in any
other circumstances.
It will not be updated and should not be relied upon for the maintenance or repair of
ARRIEL 1 engines. Only the current approved TURBOMECA maintenance technical
publications should be used for such purposes.
The acquisition of this document does not constitute proof of official formal training. Only
completion of a course delivered by a TURBOMECA-qualified instructor can lead to the
issuance of a TURBOMECA-recognised training certificate stating, when applicable, a
successful result.
Turbomeca Training - April 2012
This document is the property of TURBOMECA and it may not be copied without the express written authority of TURBOMECA.
Turbomeca Training is a registered Trademark.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

0.1

FOREWORD

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FOREWORD

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

0 - Foreword
1 - Introduction
2 - Power plant
3 - Engine
4 - Oil system
5 - Air system
6 - Fuel system

8 - Measurement and indicating


systems
9 - Starting system
10 - Electrical system
11 - Engine installation
12 - Troubleshooting
13 - Checking of knowledge

7 - Control system

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

0.2

SUMMARY

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

SUMMARY

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

0 - FOREWORD

3 - ENGINE

- Foreword........................................... 0.1
- Summary........................................... 0.2
- Table of contents............................... 0.3
- List of abbreviations.......................... 0.7
- Conversion table............................... 0.10

1 - INTRODUCTION

- General information.......................... 1.2


- Training programme......................... 1.4 - 1.5

2 - POWER PLANT

- Power plant....................................... 2.2


- Principle of adaptation to the
helicopter.......................................... 2.8
- Main characteristics.......................... 2.10
- Design and development................. 2.14
- Maintenance.................................... 2.18 - 2.31

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

- Engine presentation.......................... 3.2


- Axial compressor.............................. 3.6
- Centrifugal compressor..................... 3.8
- Combustion chamber........................ 3.10
- Gas generator turbine....................... 3.12
- Power turbine.................................... 3.14
- Exhaust system................................. 3.16
- Reduction gearbox............................ 3.18
- Transmission shaft and accessory
gearbox............................................. 3.20
- Engine - Operation........................... 3.32
- Engine - 1st line maintenance.......... 3.34 - 3.37

0.3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 - OIL SYSTEM

- Oil system presentation................... 4.2


- Oil tank - Oil cooler - Oil pressure
transmitter........................................ 4.6
- Oil pumps.......................................... 4.8
- Oil filter.............................................. 4.10
- Oil filter pre-blockage indicator......... 4.14
- Low oil pressure switch..................... 4.16
- Electrical magnetic plugs.................. 4.18
- Mechanical magnetic plugs............... 4.20
- Scavenge strainers........................... 4.22
- Centrifugal breather.......................... 4.24
- Oil system - Operation...................... 4.26
- Oil pipes and ducts.......................... 4.28
- Oil system - 1st line maintenance.... 4.30 - 4.33

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

5 - AIR SYSTEM

- Air system presentation................... 5.2


- Internal air system............................ 5.4
- Air tappings....................................... 5.6
- Compressor bleed valve................... 5.8
- External air pipes.............................. 5.16
- Air system - 1st line maintenance.... 5.18 - 5.21

6 - FUEL SYSTEM

Edition: April 2012

- Fuel system presentation................. 6.2


- Fuel Control Unit............................... 6.8
- Overspeed and drain valve.............. 6.18
- Start injector electro-valve................ 6.20
- Start injectors.................................... 6.22
- Main injection system........................ 6.24
- Combustion chamber drain valve..... 6.26
- Fuel system - Operation................... 6.28
- External fuel pipes........................... 6.32
- Fuel system - 1st line maintenance. 6.34 - 6.37

0.4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

(CONTINUED)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

(CONTINUED)

7 - CONTROL SYSTEM

- Control system presentation............. 7.2


- Control system - Operation.............. 7.6
- Control system - 1st line
maintenance.................................... 7.30 - 7.33

8 - MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEMS

- Measurement and indicating


systems presentation........................ 8.2
- Speed measurement and indicating
system............................................... 8.4
- T4 measurement and indicating
system............................................... 8.10
- Torque measurement and indicating
system............................................... 8.14
- Miscellaneous indications................. 8.18
- Measurement and indicating
systems - 1st line maintenance........ 8.22 - 8.25

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

9 - STARTING SYSTEM

- Starting system presentation............ 9.2


- Starter-generator............................... 9.6
- Ignition system.................................. 9.8
- Starting system - Operation............. 9.10
- Starting system - 1st line
maintenance.................................... 9.14 - 9.17

10 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Edition: April 2012

- Electrical system presentation.......... 10.2


- Power turbine overspeed protection
system............................................... 10.4
- Electrical harnesses.......................... 10.16
- Electrical system - 1st line
maintenance.................................... 10.18 - 10.21

0.5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
11 - ENGINE INSTALLATION

- Engine compartment......................... 11.2


- Engine mounting and lifting............... 11.4
- Air intake and exhaust system.......... 11.6
- Engine/airframe system interfaces.... 11.8
- Drains - Air vents............................... 11.16
- Power drive....................................... 11.18
- Fire protection................................... 11.20
- Engine installation - 1st line
maintenance.................................... 11.22 - 11.25

OBSERVATIONS .......................... LAST PAGE


These training notes are established to meet training
requirements and take into consideration, to a certain extent,
ATA 104 specifications.
This document has 336 pages. It was produced using a desktop
publishing system.

12 - TROUBLESHOOTING

- General............................................. 12.2
- Troubleshooting................................ 12.4
- Conclusion....................................... 12.10 - 12.11

13 - CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

- Introduction....................................... 13.2
- Questionnaire 1................................ 13.3
- Questionnaire 2................................ 13.6
- Questionnaire 3................................ 13.12
- Questionnaire 4................................. 13.15 - 13.28

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

0.6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

(CONTINUED)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
The abbreviations / symbols shown below may be used during training:
A/C................. Aircraft
AC.................. Alternating Current
ACMS............. Automatic Control Monitoring System
ACW............... Anti-clockwise
AEO................ All Engines Operating
ATA................. Air Transport Association
ATS................. Air Traffic Services
BITE............... Built In Test Equipment
cc/hr................ Cubic centimetres per hour
cSt.................. CentiStoke
CW.................. Clockwise
daN................. DecaNewtons
dB................... Decibels
DC.................. Direct Current
DGAC............. Direction Gnrale de l'Aviation Civile
EASA ............. European Aviation Safety Agency
Ec................... Kinetic energy
EGT................ Exhaust Gas Temperature
F..................... Frequency
FAA................. Federal Aviation Administration
FCU................ Fuel Control Unit
FCV................ Frequency/Voltage Converter
FMU................ Fuel Metering Unit
FOD................ Foreign Object Damage
ft..................... Feet

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

FWD............... Forward
G..................... Mass air flow
g..................... Grams
HE.................. High Energy
HF................... Human Factor
HFC................ Hourly Fuel consumption
HP................... Horsepower
HP................... High Pressure
HUMS............. Health and Usage Monitoring System
Hz................... Hertz
ICAO............... International Civil Aviation Organisation
ICP.................. Intermediate Contingency Power
ID.................... Identification
IFDS............... Integrated Flight Display System
ILS.................. Integrated Logistics Support
ISA.................. International Standard Atmosphere
ISV.................. Servo-valve intensity
kHz................. Kilohertz
kPa................. Kilopascal
kW.................. Kilowatt
l/h.................... Litre per hour
lb..................... Pound
lb/HP.hr........... Pounds per Horse Power per hour
lb/hr................ Pounds per hour
lb/sec. ............ Pounds per second

Edition: April 2012

0.7

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
LP................... Low Pressure
LRU................ Line Replaceable Unit
LTT................. Learning Through Teaching
LVDT............... Linear Voltage Differential Transducer
m..................... Metres
mA.................. Milliamperes
MAX................ Maximum
MCQ............... Multiple-Choice Questionnaire
MGB............... Main gearbox
MHz................ Megahertz
MIN................. Minimum
mm.................. Millimetre
MTBF.............. Mean Time Between Failure
MTBUR........... Mean Time Between Unscheduled
Removal
MTCP............. Maintenance Test Control Panel
MTTR.............. Mean Time to Repair
mV.................. Millivolt
N..................... Rotation speed
N1................... Gas generator rotation speed
N2................... Power turbine rotation speed
NMD............... Navigation and Mission Display
NR.................. Rotor rotation speed
OEI................. One Engine Inoperative
O/S................. Overspeed

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

(CONTINUED)

P..................... Pressure
P2................... Compressor outlet pressure
POS................ Position
ppm................ Parts per million
PSI.................. Pounds per Square Inch
PSIA............... Pounds per Square Inch Absolute
PSID............... Pounds per Square Inch Differential
PSIG............... Pounds per Square Inch Gauge
PT................... Power Turbine
RAM................ Random-Access Memory
ROM............... Read-Only Memory
rpm................. Revolutions per minute
RTD................ Resistive Temperature Device
SFC................ Specific Fuel Consumption
shp.................. Shaft horsepower
SI.................... International System
SMM............... Safety Management Manual
SMS................ Safety Management System
SRU................ Shop replaceable unit
t...................... Time
T.................... Temperature
T4................... Gas temperature
T/O.................. Take-Off
TBO................ Time Between Overhauls
TET................. Turbine Entry Temperature

Edition: April 2012

0.8

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

(CONTINUED)

TM.................. Turbomeca
TRQ................ Torque
US G............... US Gallon
VAC................ Volt, Alternating Current
VDC................ Volt, Direct Current
W.................... Power
WF.................. Fuel flow
Z..................... Altitude
Zp................... Pressure altitude

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
C................... Degrees Celsius
F.................... Degrees Fahrenheit
K..................... Kelvin
...................... Plus or Minus
..................... Ohm
..................... Difference (delta)
P................... Pressure difference
%.................... Percent
<..................... Less than
>..................... More than
..................... Angular Velocity
*...................... Datum (e.g. N1* = N1 datum)

Edition: April 2012

0.9

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

UNIT

Length

1 mm
1 m

Volume

1 dm3 = 1 litre

Mass

1 kg

= 2.2 lbs

Power

1 kW

= 1.34 HP

Temperature

C
K

Pressure

1 kPa = 0.01 bar

Flow (air, oil, fuel)

1 kg/s

Specific Fuel Consumption

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

International System

1 g/kW.h

Edition: April 2012

British or American Systems

= 0.039 inches
= 3 ft 3 inches = 39 inches
= 0.26 US gallons

= (F-32).5/9
= [(F-32).5/9] + 273
= 0.145 PSI
= 2.2 lb/sec.
= 0.00164 lb/HP.hr
0.10

CONVERSION TABLE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONVERSION TABLE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

1 - INTRODUCTION
- General information.............................................................................. 1.2
- Training programme............................................................................. 1.4 - 1.5

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

1.1

INTRODUCTION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

GENERAL INFORMATION
TURBOMECA Training

Adequate training is essential for obvious safety reasons, but also


to reduce additional maintenance costs incurred by unjustified
removals and excessive downtime.

In accordance with TURBOMECA support's proximity policy,


TURBOMECA Training has developed a worldwide training
network: it has an official office or Training Center for each
continent.

"Greater knowledge leads to greater efficiency".

TURBOMECA Training courses can therefore be conducted


worldwide:

Objectives of training

- In the TURBOMECA France reference Training Center

The main objective is the acquisition of the knowledge required


for the tasks to be achieved (know and know how).

- In the TURBOMECA USA reference Training Center


- In the TURBOMECA do Brasil reference Training Center

Further information is also communicated to widen the skill


and the experience of the trainee.

- In other TURBOMECA subsidiaries, e.g. TURBOMECA


AUSTRALASIA or TURBOMECA ASIA PACIFIC
(Singapore)

Training approach

- In delegated Training Centers

- Performance based training according to task analysis,


with classroom sessions, student involvement, practical work
and trouble shooting techniques

- In TURBOMECA approved Training Centers

- Advanced training aids: training notes, multimedia


courseware (or Computer Aided Presentation) and
demonstration training engine
- Instructors trained on the product and in training methods,
and qualified by TURBOMECA
- Courses are taught in English and French.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

- Directly on the customer's site.


The training courses are conducted by an instructor detached
from TURBOMECA or by a TURBOMECA qualified and
accredited instructor.

TURBOMECA training contact


The focal point for all your TURBOMECA Training needs is the
"TURBOMECA Operator On-Line Support" (TOOLS) web site:
www.turbomeca-support.com

Edition: April 2012

1.2

INTRODUCTION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

"The power of knowledge"

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

OBJECTIVES OF TRAINING

Adequate training is essential for obvious safety reasons,


but also to reduce additional maintenance costs incurred
by unjustified removals and excessive downtime.
TRAINING APPROACH

"Greater knowledge leads to greater efficiency".


North America Area
TM USA
RTC

Europe Africa Middle East

The focal point for all your


TURBOMECA Training needs:

www.turbomeca-support.com

TM F
RTC

Corporate
TURBOMECA
Training

TAP
RTC

TM B
RTC
South America Area

GENERAL INFORMATION
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

Asia Pacific Australasia

RTC ................. Reference Training Center


TM ................... TURBOMECA
TM F ................ TURBOMECA France
TM USA........... TURBOMECA USA
TM B................ TURBOMECA do Brasil
TAP ................. TURBOMECA Asia Pacific

1.3

INTRODUCTION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TRAINING: "The power of knowledge"

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

The training programme is established to meet the


training requirements and takes into consideration ATA 104
recommendations and the requirements of the various authorities
concerned.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TRAINING PROGRAMME

It should be noted that the "classroom sessions" alternate with


periods devoted to demonstrations, practical exercises and visits.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

1.4

INTRODUCTION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

OBJECTIVE

DURATION

FAMILIARISATION

At the end of this course, the student will be able to describe the engine, to explain its principle of
operation and to identify the main components of the engine and systems.

2 DAYS

1st LINE MAINTENANCE


COURSE

At the end of this course, the student will be able to identify the engine components, to describe and to
explain the operation of the engine and its systems, to carry out maintenance procedures (engine
installed in the airframe) and troubleshooting.

5 DAYS

2nd LINE MAINTENANCE


COURSE

At the end of this course, the student will be able to identify the engine components, to carry out
all the maintenance procedures (engine removed from the airframe), mainly the removal/installation of
modules and shop replaceable units.
PROGRAMME: The programme mainly includes practical work. This programme can be carried out
after the 1st line maintenance programme.

3 DAYS

At the end of the course, the trainee will be able to carry out the intramodular maintenance procedures
(deep maintenance).
3rd LINE MAINTENANCE
COURSE

PROGRAMME: This course consists entirely of practical work and the students must have certain
qualifications. The course documentation consists of Maintenance Technical
Instructions and the Maintenance Manual. The qualification awarded at the end of this
course has certain limits and requires regular renewal.

FROM 3 DAYS
TO 3 WEEKS

At the end of this course, the trainee will have a greater understanding of the engine and its systems.
REFRESHER

NOTE: This course is recommended for technicians who have attended the first line maintenance
course, after about one year of experience on the engine type.

2 DAYS

At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to better identify and correct operating problems.
TROUBLESHOOTING

FUEL AND CONTROL


SYSTEM

ENGINE
DOCUMENTATION

NOTE: This course is recommended for technicians who have attended the first line maintenance
course, after about one year of experience on the engine type.
At the end of this course, the trainee will have an in-depth understanding of the engine fuel and control
systems.
NOTE: This course is recommended for technicians who have attended the first line
maintenance course, after about one year of experience on the engine type.
At the end of this course, the trainee will be able to understand and use the engine documentation.
NOTE: A general knowledge of engines is recommended.

2 DAYS

2 DAYS

2 DAYS

TRAINING REQUIREMENTS / ATA 104 RECOMMENDATIONS / REQUIREMENTS OF THE VARIOUS AUTHORITIES CONCERNED

TRAINING PROGRAMME
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

1.5

INTRODUCTION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TRAINING PROGRAMME

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

2 - POWER PLANT
- Power plant (71-00-00) .......................................................................... 2.2
- Principle of adaptation to the helicopter ............................................ 2.8
- Main characteristics ............................................................................. 2.10
- Design and development..................................................................... 2.14
- Maintenance.......................................................................................... 2.18 - 2.31

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.1

POWER PLANT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER PLANT

Function

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

The power plant provides power by transforming the energy


contained in the air and fuel into shaft power.

Main characteristics
- Type: free turbine turboshaft engine, front power drive, external
power transmission shaft
- Concept: modular
- Max. Take-Off Power (MTOP): according to version
- Specific Fuel Consumption (SFC): according to version
- Output shaft speed: 6000 rpm (at 100%) (except the 1S1)
- Mass dry: approx. 126 kg (277 lb). The mass may vary
according to the engine versions.
- Engine dimensions with specific equipment. They may vary
according to the engine versions.
Length: approx. 1166 mm (45.5 inches)
Width: approx. 465,5 mm (18.2 inches)
Height: approx. 609 mm (23.8 inches)

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.2

POWER PLANT

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

GAS

AIR

POWER
FUEL
6000 RPM at 100%
(except 1S1)

POWER PLANT
Type:
Free turbine type
Concept:
Modular

Max. Take-Off Power (MTOP):


According to version

Mass dry:
Approx. 126 kg (277 lb)

Specific Fuel Consumption (SFC):


According to version

GENERAL

POWER PLANT
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.3

POWER PLANT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER PLANT
This description considers the main functional components of
the engine.

Gas generator

Transmission shaft
- External shaft located in a protecting tube which connects
the reduction gearbox to the accessory gearbox.

Accessory gearbox

- Single stage axial compressor


- Centrifugal compressor
- Annular combustion chamber with centrifugal fuel injection

- Gearbox containing the accessory drive train and the main


power drive (accessories driven by the gas generator and
the main power shaft).

- Two stage axial turbine.

Power turbine
- Single stage axial turbine.

Exhaust pipe
- Elliptical, axial exhaust pipe.

Reduction gearbox
- Reduction gearbox comprising three helical toothed gears.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.4

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

DESCRIPTION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Axial
compressor

Centrifugal
compressor

POWER TURBINE

Combustion
chamber

EXHAUST PIPE

Turbine

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GAS GENERATOR

ACCESSORY
GEARBOX

Main power drive

TRANSMISSION SHAFT

REDUCTION GEARBOX

DESCRIPTION

POWER PLANT
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.5

POWER PLANT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OPERATION

Power turbine

This part deals with the parameters and the adaptation of the
gas generator and power turbine.

The power turbine operation is defined by the balance between


the power received from the gas generator and the torque
applied on the shaft, that is the torque TRQ and the rotation
speed N2.

Component adaptation
For the engine operation, two functional assemblies can be
considered:
- The gas generator which provides kinetic energy
- The power turbine which transforms the kinetic energy into
mechanical power on a shaft.
The two assemblies have different rotation speeds.

Operation
The operation is represented by the diagram which shows the
power W, the rotation speeds N1 and N2 and the max. torque
limit TRQ imposed by the mechanical transmission:
- The torque TRQ is a function of the N2 rotation speed
- The power W is equal to the torque TRQ multiplied by the
angular velocity

Gas generator

- At constant N2 speed, the power is only a function of the


torque

The gas generator operation is defined by:


- The air mass flow G (air flow which enters the engine)
- The air pressure P2 and air temperature T2 at the centrifugal
compressor outlet

- The engine parameters can be represented as a function of


a reference parameter; N1 for example.

- The fuel flow WF injected into the combustion chamber


- The gas temperature TET at the turbine entry
- The rotation speed N1 of the gas generator
- The kinetic energy Ec supplied to the turbine.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.6

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

POWER PLANT

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

N1
(rotation speed)

G
(air mass
flow)

P3, T3
(compressor outlet
pressure and temperature)

.
ax

to

qu

TRQ
(shaft torque)
Ec
(kinetic
energy)

N2
(constant rotation speed)
W
(shaft power)

TET
(turbine entry temperature)
WF
(fuel flow)
TRQ

R
eT

POWER TURBINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GAS GENERATOR

Isospeeds
N1

ENGINE
PARAMETERS
G

W = TRQ .
= 2. .N
60

0
/P
P2 W
C
HF T
TE

SFC

N2
Power W and speeds N1, N2

N2
Torque TRQ as a function of N2

N1

P2/P0: Compression ratio


HFC: Hourly fuel consumption
SFC: Specific fuel consumption

OPERATION

POWER PLANT
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.7

POWER PLANT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Installation requirements

Power transmission

The main functional requirements of the installation are:

The mechanical power supplied by the engine, is used to drive


the helicopter rotors through a mechanical transmission.
This power drives:

- Max. torque limit TRQ (usually imposed by the aircraft


transmission)

- The main rotor (approximately 82%)

- Complete engine protection (N1 and N2 speeds, TET


temperature, compressor surge WF/t)

- The tail rotor (approximately 10%)


- The main gearbox (approximately 8%).

- Good load sharing (in the case of a multi-engine


configuration).

Twin-engine configuration
In a twin-engine configuration, the engines are installed at the
rear of the main gearbox.
The power turbines of the two engines are mechanically
connected to the main gearbox which drives the rotors (main
and tail rotors).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

- Constant rotor rotation speed NR in all operating


conditions

Adaptation to requirements
To have a constant rotation speed of the power turbine N2, the
power supplied by the engine is automatically adapted to the
demand. This adaptation is ensured by the control system which
meters the fuel flow injected into the combustion chamber so as
to deliver the required power (variation of the gas generator N1
rotation speed) while keeping the engine within its operational
limits.

Edition: April 2012

2.8

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PRINCIPLE OF ADAPTATION TO THE


HELICOPTER

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

MAIN
ROTOR
ENGINE 2

ENGINE
100%

TAIL
ROTOR

ENGINE 1
MAIN GEARBOX
8%

TAIL ROTOR
10%

MAIN GEARBOX

POWER TRANSMISSION

TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION
N2

W - Power

NR

N1, N2, TET, WF/t


ENGINE

N2
N2

Max. torque TRQ

ADAPTATION TO REQUIREMENTS

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

PRINCIPLE OF ADAPTATION TO THE HELICOPTER


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

time

Edition: April 2012

2.9

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MAIN ROTOR
82%

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
The engine ratings correspond to given conditions of helicopter
operation. The ratings are generally defined under determined
speed and temperature conditions.

Note 1: In single-engine configuration, only the MTOP and


Max. Continuous Power ratings are authorised.
Note 2: Use of the OEI ratings: Use of these ratings requires
certain maintenance procedures to be carried out.

The following engine ratings are considered:


- AEO ratings (All Engines Operating):
Max. Take-Off Power (MTOP): max. rating which can be
used during take-off. This rating has a limited duration
(5min. continuous)
Max. Continuous Power: rating which can be used
without time limitation (this does not imply that it is used
permanently)
- OEI ratings (One Engine Inoperative):
Max. Contingency Power (MCP): rating which can be
used in the case of one engine failure during take-off or
landing. This rating is limited to a period of continuous
operation: 2 min. 30 sec.
Intermediate Contingency Power (ICP): rating which
can be used in the case of one engine failure in flight.
This rating is limited to 30 min. or unlimited (according
to versions).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.10

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ENGINE RATINGS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

N1
MCP
2 min. 30 sec.

MTOP (5 min.)

ICP

Max.
Continuous

30 min.
or unlimited

Power

AEO
RATINGS

OEI
RATINGS

Note: The power indicated corresponds to the following configuration: engine installed,
max. torque in the corresponding rating, ISA conditions at sea level.

ENGINE RATINGS

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.11

POWER PLANT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
The engine is designed to operate within a given climatic
envelope.
The envelope is defined by:

Note: The engine operates within various limits: rotation


speeds, temperatures, pressures

Refer to corresponding chapters and official


publications.

- The atmospheric temperature T0


- The pressure altitude Zp
- And lines of standard atmosphere.

Flight envelope
The flight envelope is illustrated by the T0/Zp diagram and the
lines of standard atmosphere, with the max. tropical zone and
the min. arctic zone.

Starting and relight envelope


The starting and relight envelope is defined in the same way,
but it is also affected by the specifications of oil and fuel used,
and sometimes by particular procedures.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.12

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ENGINE OPERATING ENVELOPE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ISA - International standard


atmosphere

Max. - Tropical zone


T0

Min. - Arctic zone

+50

+50

+15

Max.

Max.

ISA

ISA

Min.

-50

-500 m

T0

Depending on oil and fuel


specifications. Can also require
special operating procedures.

-50

Zp

Min.

FLIGHT ENVELOPE

Zp
STARTING AND RELIGHT
ENVELOPE

ENGINE OPERATING ENVELOPE

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.13

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT


Development steps

Principles of design

- Certification in 1977 by the French Authorities

The engine is designed to meet the aircraft propulsion


requirements and particularly for the new generation of
helicopters.

- The first production engine was delivered in January 1978

The engine design is based on:


- An optimised thermodynamic cycle which gives high
performance
- Simple and reliable components giving a good supportability,
and a good maintainability to reduce the costs.

- ARRIEL engines will be in service for long years.

Engine designation
- Example: ARRIEL 1A2.
ARRIEL - According to TURBOMECA tradition: name of a
Pyrenean lake.
- 1: Type

Engine development
The ARRIEL engine is based on research and experience of
other engines:

- A: Variant
- 2: Version.

- First generation engines: ASTAZOU, ARTOUSTE and


TURMO.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.14

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Optimised
thermodynamic cycle

ARRIEL 1
640 - 700 shp
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Engine design

Simple and reliable


components

ASTAZOU
500 - 1000 shp

Supportability
Maintainability

High
performance

ARTOUSTE
400 - 850 shp

Cost
reduction

TURMO
1500 - 1600 shp

ENGINE DEVELOPMENT

PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN
ARRIEL lake

STEPS
2011
10000th
Arriel (1 and 2)
1978
First
production
1977
Certification

Example:
ARRIEL:

ARRIEL 1A2
Name of a Pyrenean lake
for the turboshaft engines
1: Type
A: Variant
2: Version
ENGINE DESIGNATION

time
DEVELOPMENT STEPS

GENERAL

DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.15

POWER PLANT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT


The ARRIEL 1 is presently destined for the following helicopters:
Squirrel and Dolphin (EUROCOPTER), A109 K2 (Agusta),
S 76 (Sikorsky), BK117 (EUROCOPTER).

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

APPLICATIONS

Maintenance concept
The main aspects of the maintenance concept are the
following:
- Full modularity
- Good accessibility
- Reduced removal and installation times
- "On-condition" monitoring
- High initial TBO
- Low cost of ownership:
Low production costs
Durability (defined and proven TBO and life limits)
High reliability
Low fuel consumption.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.16

POWER PLANT

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

SQUIRREL
(EUROCOPTER)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

REGA

A 109 K2
(AGUSTA)

DOLPHIN
(EUROCOPTER)

I-RAIE

BK 117
(EUROCOPTER)

MAINTENANCE CONCEPT
- Full modularity
- Good accessibility
- Reduced removal and installation times
- "On-condition" monitoring
- High initial TBO
- Low cost of ownership:
Low production costs
Durability (defined and proven TBO
and life limits)
High reliability
Low fuel consumption.

S 76
(SIKORSKY)

APPLICATIONS

DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.17

POWER PLANT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE CONCEPT

2nd line maintenance: engine maintenance in workshop.

Introduction

- Corrective maintenance: SRU and module removal and


installation.

The engine is designed to have a high availability rate with


reduced maintenance.
The main aspects of the maintenance concept are the following:
- Effective modularity
- Good accessibility

3rd line maintenance: deep maintenance which involves


module repairs.
- Corrective maintenance: component replacement.
4th line maintenance: overhaul and repair in specific workshop.

- On-condition facility

- Maintenance scheduled when the TBO is completed or when


the life limit of a component is reached
- Corrective maintenance.

- Quick repair.

Other aspects of maintenance

Maintenance levels

Refer to the following pages.

Four maintenance levels can be considered:

Note 1: LRU - Line Replaceable Unit



SRU - Shop Replaceable Unit.

- Reduced removal and installation times

1st line maintenance:


- Scheduled and preventive maintenance
Checks and inspections
Life limit or completed TBO removal
- Corrective maintenance
Fault detection
Component replacement (LRU)
Check.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Note 2: The maintenance steps are determined by the operator


taking into account the difficulties, the personnel and
logistic considerations.

As far as the engine manufacturer is concerned, the
current maintenance procedures (1st, 2nd line) are
defined and described in the maintenance manual.
Deep maintenance (3rd line) and overhaul (4th line)
are described in other documents and are subject to
particular license agreements.

Edition: April 2012

2.18

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE LEVELS

1st LINE MAINTENANCE


- Scheduled or preventive
maintenance
- Corrective maintenance
(LRU)

2nd LINE MAINTENANCE


- Corrective maintenance
(modules, SRU)

Maintenance Manual
(Operator or Service Centre
or Maintenance Centre)

4th LINE MAINTENANCE


3rd LINE MAINTENANCE
(engine removed)
(engine removed in specific workshop)
- Scheduled maintenance
- Deep maintenance
(overhaul, repair)
- Corrective maintenance
Maintenance Technical
Instruction
(Operator or Maintenance Centre)

Overhaul Manual
(Repair Centre)

MAINTENANCE CONCEPT

MAINTENANCE

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.19

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE
Counting of hours and cycles
A cycle is a clearly defined operating sequence.

TBOs
TBOs (Times Between Overhauls) are defined for the engine,
the modules and some accessories. These TBOs, determined
by tests and experience, are subject to an extension programme.
The TBO is expressed in flight hours.

Life limits
Certain components (mainly rotating parts such as compressor,
turbines, injection wheel) have a life limit which requires the
part to be scrapped when the limit is reached.
The life limit is expressed in operating cycles (N1 or N2 cycles).

Calendar limits
The calendar limit is the time (expressed in years) after which
the complete engine, module or part subjected to calendar limit
has to be returned to the factory or an approved repair center.
The count starts at the engine first installation in the aircraft
(since new, overhaul or repair).

Cycles and hours are counted either manually or automatically.


The methods for counting hours and cycles and the various
limits are described in Chapter5 of the Maintenance Manual.
A counting check (comparison between automatic counting
and manual counting) is a procedure planned in the periodic
maintenance.
A simple check can be carried out by comparing the two engine
readings for a given period of operation.

On-condition
Some components have no TBO, no life limit and no calendar
limit. They are generally considered to be "on-condition"
components.

Use-limited parts
These parts have a maximum usage defined in hours; this
includes parts such as bearings, casings and shafts. Their limits
are greater than the normal TBO of the engine, thus permitting
them to be used over two or more TBOs, which reduces engine
overhaul costs for the customer.
These parts and their corresponding limits are listed in the
engine log book.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.20

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

LIFE LIMITATIONS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TBOs

COUNTING OF HOURS
AND CYCLES

"ON-CONDITION"

- Engine
- Modules
- Accessories

- Manual counting
- Automatic counting
- Counting check

Some components have no TBO,


no life limit and no calendar limit.
They are generally considered to
be "on-condition" components.

USE-LIMITED PARTS

LIFE LIMITS

Maximum usage:
- Defined in hours
- Greater than the normal TBO
Usable for two or more TBOs,
which reduce engine overhaul
costs

Cycles for:
- Compressors
- Turbines
- Injection wheel

CALENDAR LIMITS
Time limits:
- Engine
- Modules
- Part
(since new, overhaul or repair)

N1 and N2 cycle
displays according
to variant

Cycle counter
according to
engine variant

LIFE LIMITATIONS

MAINTENANCE
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.21

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE
Preventive maintenance is a schedule of planned maintenance
actions aimed at the prevention of failures.
It includes two inspection types.

Examples of considered means


- Borescopic inspection: this permits inspection of internal
parts which are not accessible without disassembly
- Lubrication oil check: various methods are used to check
for the contamination of the oil (magnetic plugs, strainers
sampling). Samples of oil are taken at regular intervals and
the samples are analysed to measure the contamination
and anticipate incipient failures (analysis by magnetoscopy,
ferrography, spectrometric oil analysis)

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)


- Inspection "after the last flight of the day"
- Inspection "before the first flight of the day"
- "Pre-flight" inspections

- Vibration level check: the vibration level of the rotating


assemblies gives an indication of the engine condition

- "Post-flight" inspections.

Servicing inspections (1E2)

- Power check: it is ensured by the pilot (refer to "Flight


Manual")

- Inspection before the first flight of the day

- Visual inspection: conventional visual inspections are also


considered for on-condition monitoring.

- Inspection between two flights


- Inspection after 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Periodic inspections

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

- These procedures can be "blocked" (at fixed intervals for all


the procedures) or staggered (each procedure is distributed
over a period of time to reduce the turnaround time while still
respecting the intervals)

The objective is to put the engine back into normal service


as soon as possible. Corrective maintenance includes
all procedures which must be carried out when required
(failures, anomalies, etc ).

- Visits are scheduled as a function of flight hours (e.g.: every


500 hours) or calendar (e.g.: 2 years)
- Special inspections:
Particular inspections
Inspections according to airworthiness.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.22

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Servicing inspections / Periodic inspections


EXAMPLE OF MAIN INSPECTION POINTS
-

Visual checks
Inspection of filters
Inspection of magnetic plugs
Oil sampling (for analysis)
Oil level (and replenishment if required)
Compressor cleaning (depending on
operating conditions)
- Ground run test
- ...

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION OIL CHECK

VIBRATION LEVEL
CHECK

To put the engine back into normal service


as soon as possible

BORESCOPIC INSPECTION

VISUAL INSPECTION

EXAMPLE OF MAIN TASKS


-

Troubleshooting
Run-down check
Functional and condition checks
Removal and installation
Adjustments
Miscellaneous procedures (cleaning, storage ...)
Repair (or replacement)
Particular instructions

FLI

GH

REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 05

TM

AN

UA

POWER CHECK

PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.23

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE
- A list of failures observed during use

This part deals with the 1st and 2nd lines engine technical
documentation.

- A list of failures observed during maintenance


- A list of troubleshooting tasks.

Maintenance documents

Identification documents

The maintenance documents are:

The identification documents are:

- The current maintenance documents (1st and 2nd lines):


Maintenance Manual (describes the engine and its
systems and all the maintenance procedures)
Service Bulletins (approved by the authorities, and issued
to inform the operators of a modification or an instruction
which affects the operational aspects)
Service Letters (letter sent to inform the operator of certain
instructions related to the operation of the engine)
Modification Index

- The servicing-maintenance documents:


Spare Parts Catalogue (list and reference of all the spare
parts)
Special Tools Catalogue (tool designations and part
numbers).

Standard practices: practices which are not specific to a


product. When applied to a given engine, they are however
described in chapter 70 of the Maintenance Manual

Operation documents
The operation documents are:
- Engine log book (records and provides information on the
engine status)

Main practices: thread inserts, LOCTITE products, tightening


torques, locking of assemblies, electrical connectors, ...

- Flight Manual (the Flight Manual is the pilot's basic reference


document and specifies the limitations, the normal and
emergency procedures, and the performance data. It is
approved by the Airworthiness Authorities).

Troubleshooting

Electronic documentation

It forms the last volume of Maintenance Manual. Chapter


71-00-06 of the Maintenance Manual, which is dedicated to
troubleshooting includes:

- Maintenance Technical Publications: these are electronic


versions of the maintenance documentation

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

- TOOLS: It is a service providing real issue of technical


publication as service bulletins, service letters, maintenance
manual updating... Each new document edition will be notified
and provided by email in real time to subscriber.

Edition: April 2012

2.24

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - PRESENTATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

IDENTIFICATION

ARRIEL

ARRIEL

ARRIEL

ARRIEL

ARRIEL

ARRIEL

ARRIEL

MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
vol. 1

MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
vol. 2

SERVICE
BULLETINS

SERVICE
LETTERS

MODIFICATION
INDEX

SPARE
PARTS
CATALOGUE

TOOLS
CATALOGUE

OPERATION

COMPOSITION OF THE MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAP

ARRIEL
1

00
05

MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
vol. 3
CHAP. 71-00-06
TROUBLESHOOTING

26
70
71
72
73
74
75
77
78
79
80

Failures observed
during use
Failures observed
during maintenance
Troubleshooting
tasks

DESIGNATION
Introduction
Time limits /
Maintenance checks
Fire protection
Standard practices
Power plant
Engine
Fuel system
Ignition
Air
Engine indicating
Exhaust system
Lubrication
Starting

ENGINE
LOG BOOK

(compiled according to recommendations of the


American standard "ATA 100")

FLI

GH

TM

AN

UA

ELECTRONIC

MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL
PUBLICATION

TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - PRESENTATION

MAINTENANCE

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.25

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE
Three types of advisory notice are used in the technical
publications:
- WARNING

Examples
WARNING: do not breath the oil vapors. Do not leave oil in
contact with the skin.
CAUTION: if the flush is being carried out because of metal
particles in the oil system, change the filter and thoroughly
clean the tank.

- CAUTION
- NOTE.

NOTE: take the oil sample before carrying out any


replenishment.

Interpretation
WARNING: warns the reader of the possibility of physical harm
(e.g. wounding, intoxication, electrocution).
CAUTION: warns the reader of the possibility of damaging the
engine or tooling.
NOTE: gives the reader advice on how best to carry out a
task.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.26

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - ADVISORY NOTICES

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

WARNING
(physical harm)

CAUTION
(possibility of damage)

NOTE
(advice)

Examples:

Examples:

Examples:

Toxicity of engine oil and vapours


Toxicity of cleaning products
Toxicity of extinguishing products
Eye protection
Fire risk
Electrical discharge from ignition units:
- electrocution
- risks with use in an inflammable
atmosphere
-

Titanium part cleaning


Scrapping of O'ring seals
Use of the correct cleaning products
Engine cooling
Engine cleaning after use of
extinguishing product
Orifice protection during removal
Borescope fragility
Tightening torque

Oil analysis
Cycle counting
Installation of O'ring seals
Engine storage
Insulation measurements
Procedural change with modification

TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS - ADVISORY NOTICES

MAINTENANCE

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.27

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE
PRESERVATION AND STORAGE

LUBRICANTS / FUELS / MATERIALS

Type of storage

The engine manufacturer recommends the use of synthetic oils


which keep their lubricating properties over a wide temperature
range and have a longer operating life.
The maintenance manual (chapter 71) contains specification
tables and precautions.
We shall remind you here that the mixture of oils of different
types or brands is not recommended. Therefore the system
should be flushed when the oil specification is changed.

Fuels

The maintenance manual (chapter 71) contains tables indicating


the fuel types with the corresponding US, UK, NATO and French
specifications.
Two types of fuel can be considered:
- The "normal fuels" which can be used without restriction in
all the operating envelope
- The alternative fuels (or replacement fuels) which may be
used, but with particular restrictions (additives...) and for a
limited time in order not to affect the engine TBO.

Materials

Various products are used for engine maintenance.


For example graphite grease, molybdenum disulphide for the
installation of parts, cleaning and inhibiting products.
The various products must be used carefully, for instance use
of trichlorethylene on titanium alloy parts is forbidden.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Engine uninstalled
Refer to maintenance manual for preservation and storage
procedures and periodicity.
"Short term" storage
Procedure which protects the engine for a duration of less than
three months.
"Long term" storage
Procedure which protects the engine for a duration of more
than three months. The max. duration of storage varies with
the type of container used (wooden or metal container). With
wooden container, the max. duration of storage also varies with
the type of cover used.

Engine installed in the aircraft


- For a duration of less than 6 months, 2 types of storage
can be considered : "operational" (with 5 min. ground run)
and "not operational" (with dry crank).
- For a duration of more than 6 months, remove the engine
and do the long term storage procedure.

Storage inspection
Once the engine has been put into storage, it must be periodically
checked to ensure that it is in good condition. In the event of
an anomaly, the preservation and storage procedures must
be renewed.

Edition: April 2012

2.28

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Lubricants

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

GENERAL
- Protection against corrosive
agents

- NORMAL LUBRICANTS: medium viscosity


synthetic oils
- ALTERNATIVE LUBRICANTS: medium and
low viscosity oils
- No mixture of oils of different brands
- Flushing of the system when the oil
specification is changed

TYPE OF STORAGE
ENGINE UNINSTALLED
- "Short term" storage: duration less than
3 months
- "Long term" storage: duration more than
3 months (wooden or metal container)

FUELS
(Maintenance manual, chapter 71)
- NORMAL FUELS (without restriction)
- ALTERNATIVE FUELS (with particular
restrictions: operating times, additives...)

ENGINE INSTALLED IN THE AIRCRAFT


- Duration less than 6 months
- Duration more than 6 months

MATERIALS
- PART INSTALLATION: graphite grease,
molybdenum disulphide...
- CLEANING: water, fuel, alcohol, detergent...
- STORAGE: water-repellent product...

Refer to
maintenance manual for
preservation and storage
procedures and
periodicity

STORAGE INSPECTION
- To be carried out periodically
- Renewal of preservation and storage
if necessary

LUBRICANTS / FUELS / MATERIALS - PRESERVATION AND STORAGE

MAINTENANCE

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.29

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

LUBRICANTS
(Maintenance manual, chapter 71)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAINTENANCE
The International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) requires that
states establish a safety programme to achieve an acceptable
level of safety in aviation operations. Therefore states shall
require that individual operators, maintenance organisations,
ATS providers and certified aerodrome operators implement a
Safety Management System (SMS) accepted by the state.

Environment - The situation in which the SHELL system must


function, the social and economic climate as
well as the natural environment
Liveware - The human beings' engineers, technicians, aircrew,
managers and administration personnel
The edges of the blocks are not simple and straight because each
component has to be adapted to the others. When considering
HF, all the interfaces have to be taken into account:

ICAO provides a Safety Management Manual (SMM) which


explains in detail the implementation of an SMS on 19
chapters.

- Liveware - Software

HUMAN FACTORS

- Liveware - Hardware

The European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) requires that


aviation maintenance personnel receive training on Human
Factors (HF).

- Liveware - Environment

They must have an initial HF training followed by regular


refresher training.

The EASA part 145 recommends 1 to 3 days initial training on


HF depending on the persons concerned and further training
every 2 years.

Below is a precis of the ICAO SHELL model which is a conceptual


model proposed in ICAO circular 216-AN31. It represents the
different components of human factors and is only intended as
a basic aid to understanding HF:

- Liveware - Liveware

Software - The rules, procedures, written documents, etc.,


which are part of standard procedures
Hardware - Tools, equipment, workshop, hangar

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.30

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

SAFETY MANAGEMENT

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Chapter 01

Overview

Chapter 02

Responsibility for managing safety

Chapter 03

State Safety programme

Chapter 04

Understanding Safety

Chapter 05

Basics of safety management

Chapter 06

Risk management

Chapter 07

Hazard and Incident reporting

Chapter 08

Safety Investigations

Chapter 09

Safety analysis and Safety studies

Chapter 10

Safety performance monitoring

Chapter 11

Emergency response planning

Chapter 12

Establishing a safety management system

Chapter 13

Safety assessments

Chapter 14

Safety auditing

Chapter 15

Practical considerations for operating a safety


management system

Chapter 16

Aircraft Operations

Chapter 17

Air Traffic Services (ATS)

Chapter 18

Aerodrome Operations

Chapter 19

Aircraft maintenance

HARDWARE

SOFTWARE

SAFETY MANAGEMENT

LIVEWARE

ENVIRONMENT

LIVEWARE

HUMAN FACTORS

SAFETY MANAGEMENT - HUMAN FACTORS

MAINTENANCE

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

2.31

POWER PLANT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CHAPTERS OF SAFETY
MANAGEMENT MANUAL (SMM)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

3 - ENGINE
- Engine presentation (72-00-00)............................................................ 3.2
- Axial compressor (72-30-02)................................................................ 3.6
- Centrifugal compressor (72-40-01)...................................................... 3.8
- Combustion chamber (72-40-02)......................................................... 3.10
- Gas generator turbine (72-40-03)......................................................... 3.12
- Power turbine (72-50-01)...................................................................... 3.14
- Exhaust system (78-51-01)................................................................... 3.16
- Reduction gearbox (72-60-00).............................................................. 3.18
- Transmission shaft and accessory gearbox (72-10-00).................... 3.20
- Engine - Operation (72-00-00).............................................................. 3.32
- Engine - 1st line maintenance............................................................. 3.34 - 3.37

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.1

ENGINE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE PRESENTATION
Main components

Function
The engine transforms the energy in the air and fuel into
mechanical power on a shaft.

Main characteristics
- Type: Free turbine with forward drive via an external shaft
- Power class: from 480 to 560 kW (650 to 760 shp) according
to version
- Specific fuel consumption: according to version (see
maintenance manual)
- Gas generator speed (N1): approx. 52000rpm at
100%
Direction of rotation: anti-clockwise (ACW)

- Gas generator
Axial compressor
Centrifugal compressor
Combustion chamber
Turbine

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

- Power turbine
- Exhaust pipe
- Reduction gearbox
- Transmission shaft
- Accessory gearbox.

- Power turbine speed (N2): approx. 41600 rpm at 100%


Direction of rotation: clockwise (CW)
- Output shaft speed: 6000 RPM at 100% (except the 1S1)
Direction of rotation: clockwise (CW)
Note: Direction of rotation given viewed from the rear.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.2

ENGINE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
Axial
compressor

Centrifugal
compressor

Combustion
chamber

Turbine

POWER
TURBINE

EXHAUST
PIPE

Type:
Free turbine with forward drive via
an external shaft
Power class:
From 480 to 560 kW
(650 to 760 shp) according to version
Specific fuel consumption:
According to version
(see maintenance manual)
Gas generator speed (N1):
Approx. 52000 rpm at 100%; ACW
Power turbine speed (N2):
Approx. 41600 rpm at 100%; CW
Output shaft speed:
6000 rpm at 100%
(except the 1S1); CW

ACCESSORY
GEARBOX

TRANSMISSION
SHAFT

REDUCTION
GEARBOX

GENERAL

ENGINE PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.3

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GAS GENERATOR

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE PRESENTATION

Modular layout

Note 1: A module is a sub-assembly which can be replaced


on-site (2nd line maintenance) without complex tooling
or adaptation work.

A module is a sub-assembly which can be replaced on-site (2nd


line maintenance) without complex tooling or adaptation work.

Each module has an identification plate. The engine identification


plate is fitted on the right hand side of the M01 protection tube.

Each module has an identification plate. The engine


identification plate is fitted on the right-hand side of
the M01 protection tube.

Note 2: Some accessories are provided with each module.

The engine comprises 5 modules:


- Module M01: Transmission shaft and accessory gearbox

In these training notes, those components are dealt with


in the chapters corresponding to the main systems.

- Module M02: Axial compressor


- Module M03: Gas generator HP section
- Module M04: Power turbine
- Module M05: Reduction gearbox.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.4

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

DESCRIPTION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MODULE M02
AXIAL COMPRESSOR

MODULE M03
GAS GENERATOR
HIGH PRESSURE SECTION

MODULE M04
POWER TURBINE

MODULE M05
REDUCTION GEARBOX

MODULES IDENTIFICATION
PLATES

MODULE M01
TRANSMISSION SHAFT
AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION
PLATE

DESCRIPTION

ENGINE PRESENTATION
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.5

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

AXIAL COMPRESSOR
Function

- Stationary components:
Diffuser
Casing.

The axial compressor ensures a first stage of compression to


supercharge the centrifugal compressor.

Functional description

Position

The axial compressor ensures a first stage of compression in


order to supercharge the centrifugal compressor.

- At the front of the engine (the axial compressor assembly


forms the module M02).

Compressor airflow

Main characteristics
- Type: axial transonic supercharging compressor
- Airflow: 2.5 kg/sec (5.5 lb/sec.)

The ambient air, admitted through the air intake duct and
guided by the inlet cone, flows between the blades of the axial
compressor. The air is discharged rearwards with an increased
axial velocity.

- Wheel made of titanium alloy, cut from the solid.

The air then flows through the vanes of the diffuser. Due to the
divergent passage, the air velocity is reduced and the pressure
increased.

Main components

The flow is straightened by the stator vanes before being admitted,


through an annular duct, to the centrifugal compressor.

- Rotating components:
Air inlet cone
Axial wheel
Shaft
Bearing
Accessory drive shaft

Note: In order to avoid compressor surge, a valve discharges


overboard a certain amount of air in certain operating
conditions.

- Rotation speed: N1; ACW

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.6

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PRESENTATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Type:
Axial transonic
supercharging compressor
Airflow:
2.5 kg/s (5.5 lb/sec.)

P1': AIR DISCHARGED


THROUGH THE COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE

Rotation speed:
N1; ACW
WHEEL

DIFFUSER

Wheel made of titanium


alloy, cut from the solid
SHAFT

COMPRESSION AND
STRAIGHTENING OF THE AIR

ACCELERATION
OF THE AIR

ADMISSION
OF AMBIENT AIR

AIR INLET
CONE

BEARING

CASING

ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT

SUPERCHARGING OF THE
CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR

PRESENTATION

AXIAL COMPRESSOR
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.7

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
Function

- Stationary components:
Diffusers
Casings.

The compressor supplies the compressed air required for


combustion.

Functional description

Supercharged by the axial compressor, it ensures the second


stage of compression.

The centrifugal compressor ensures the main stage of


compression.

Position

Compressor airflow

- At the front of the module M03.

The air supplied by the axial compressor flows between the


blades of the centrifugal compressor. The air pressure increases
due to the divergent passage between the blades and the air
velocity increases due to the centrifugal flow.

Main characteristics
- Type: centrifugal, high efficiency
- Airflow: 2.5 kg/s (5.5 lb/sec.)
- Compression ratio: 5.4 / 1 (global: 8.2 / 1)
- Rotation speed: N1; ACW
- Wheel made of titanium alloy, cut from the solid.

The air leaves the tips of the blades at very high velocity and
then flows through the 1st stage diffuser vanes where the velocity
is decreased and the pressure is increased.
The air then passes through an elbow and the flow becomes
axial. In the 2nd stage diffuser, the velocity is again decreased
and the pressure increased. The air is then admitted into the
combustion chamber.

Main components
- Rotating components:
Wheel
Shaft
Bearing

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.8

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PRESENTATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Airflow:
2.5 kg/s (5.5 lb/sec.)
DIFFUSERS

CASINGS

BEARING

Compression ratio:
5.4 / 1 (global: 8.2 / 1)
Rotation speed:
N1; ACW
Wheel made of titanium
alloy, cut from the solid

SUPERCHARGING
BY THE AXIAL
COMPRESSOR

COMPRESSION
OF THE AIR IN THE
DIFFUSER STAGES
AIR ADMITTED
INTO THE
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER

ACCELERATION
AND COMPRESSION
OF THE AIR

CENTRIFUGAL
WHEEL

PRESENTATION

CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.9

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Type:
Centrifugal, high efficiency

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PRESENTATION

Combustion chamber flow

Function

In the combustion chamber, the compressed air is divided into two


flows: a primary air flow mixed with the fuel for combustion and
a secondary air flow (or dilution air flow) for cooling of the gas.

The combustion chamber forms an enclosure in which the air/


fuel mixture is burnt.

Position
- Central section of the gas generator.

A second part flows through the hollow vanes of the turbine


nozzle guide vane (cooling of the vanes) and through the
orifices of the rear swirl plate.

Main characteristics
- Type: annular with centrifugal fuel injection

The primary air is mixed with the fuel sprayed by the injection
wheel. The combustion occurs between the two swirl plates.
The flame temperature reaches approx. 2500C (4532F).

- Made of special alloy

Main components

- Secondary air: the secondary air (or dilution air) flows


through the orifices of the mixer unit and the dilution tubes.
It is calibrated to obtain flame stability, cooling of the gas,
and distribution of temperature on the turbine.

- Outer part:
Front swirl plate
Mixer unit

- Gas: The gas produced by the combustion is directed into


the turbine nozzle guide vane.

- Inner part:
Rear swirl plate
Shroud

- Drain: a combustion chamber drain valve, fitted on a flange


on the bottom of the turbine casing drains overboard any
residual fuel.

- Fuel injection system


- Turbine casing

Operating parameters

- Combustion chamber drain valve.

Functional description
The combustion chamber forms an enclosure in which the fuel/
air mixture is burnt.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

- Primary air: one part flows through the orifices of the front
swirl plate.

The fuel/air ratio for combustion (primary air) is approximately1/15;


the total fuel/air ratio is approximately 1/45.
The pressure drop in the combustion chamber is approximately
4%.

Edition: April 2012

3.10

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

COMBUSTION CHAMBER

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Type:
Annular with centrifugal
fuel injection

Primary air (combustion)


Secondary air (dilution)

Made of special alloy


OUTER PART
Front swirl
plate

Mixer unit

Gaz

INNER PART
Rear swirl
plate

COMPRESSED AIR

Shroud

FUEL
INJECTION
SYSTEM
Combustion chamber
drain valve

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

TURBINE
CASING

FUEL INJECTION

GAS FLOW TO THE


TURBINE

COMBUSTION
(2500C / 4532F)

PRESENTATION

COMBUSTION CHAMBER
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.11

ENGINE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PRESENTATION

Functional description

Function

The gas generator turbine transforms the gas energy into


mechanical power to drive the compressors and various
accessories.

The turbine extracts sufficient energy from the gas flow to drive
the compressors and the accessories.

Position

The operation is characterised by the first phase of


expansion.

- At the rear of the gas generator.

Turbine gas flow

Main characteristics

The gas first flows through the nozzle guide vanes.


The gas velocity increases due to the convergent passage.

- Type: two stage axial


- Speed rotation: N1; ACW

The flow on the blades results in aerodynamic forces whose


resultant causes the rotation of the wheel.

- Turbine inlet temperature: approx. 1100C (2012F) according


to engine variant

The gas, still containing energy, is directed to the power


turbine.

- Made of special alloy.

Main components
- Rotating components:
Wheels
Shafts
Bearing
- Stationary components:
Nozzle guide vanes
Containment shield
Casing.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.12

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GAS GENERATOR TURBINE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Rotation

Speed rotation:
N1; ACW
NOZZLE GUIDE
VANES

WHEELS

Turbine inlet temperature:


Approx. 1100C (2012F)
according to engine variant
Made of special alloy

BEARING

NOZZLE GUIDE VANES


(convergent passage)

Nozzle
guide vane

Turbine
wheel

GAS TO THE
POWER TURBINE

GAS FROM THE


COMBUSTION
CHAMBER

COMPRESSOR
DRIVE

CONTAINMENT
SHIELD

CASING

SHAFTS

ROTATION

PRESENTATION

GAS GENERATOR TURBINE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.13

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Type:
Two stage axial

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PRESENTATION

Functional description

Function

The power turbine transforms the gas energy into mechanical


power to drive the reduction gearbox.

The turbine extracts the energy from the gas to drive the power
shaft through the reduction gearbox.

Position
- Between the gas generator and the reduction gearbox.
It forms the module M04.

Main characteristics
- Type: axial, single stage
- Speed rotation: N2; CW
- Made of special alloy

The operation is characterised by the second phase of


expansion.

Turbine flow
The gas supplied by the gas generator flows through the nozzle
guide vane. In the nozzle guide vane, the gas velocity increases
due to the convergent passage.
The gas are directed onto the turbine wheel and the resultant
of the aerodynamic forces on the blades causes the wheel
to rotate. The gas are then expelled overboard through the
exhaust pipe.

Main components
- Rotating components:
Wheel
Shaft
Bearings
- Stationary components:
Nozzle guide vane
Containment shield
Casing.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.14

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

POWER TURBINE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Speed rotation:
N2; CW
NOZZLE GUIDE
VANE

WHEEL

BEARINGS

Made of special alloy


Rotation

ROTATION
OF THE
POWER TURBINE

Nozzle guide
vane

Turbine
wheel

REDUCTION
GEARBOX
DRIVE (CW)

GAS FROM THE


GAS GENERATOR
TURBINE
EXPANSION IN THE
NOZZLE GUIDE VANE

CONTAINMENT
SHIELD

POWER
TURBINE CASING

SHAFT

GAS
EXHAUST

PRESENTATION

POWER TURBINE
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.15

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Type:
Axial, single stage

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Functional description

The exhaust system continues the expansion phase and expels


the gas overboard.

The exhaust pipe, which has an elliptical outlet, is made from


stainless steel. It is bolted to the rear flange of the power turbine
casing with the containment shield.

Position

A heat shield is fitted between the exhaust pipe and the reduction
gearbox to protect the gearbox from the exhaust heat.

- Behind the power turbine, around the reduction gear.

The exhaust pipe has a drain at the bottom.

Main characteristics

Functionally it should be noted that the exhaust gas still contains


a certain amount of energy which produces a small residual
thrust.

- Type: Elliptical
- Non-modular part
- Gas temperature: 600C (1080F)
- Made of stainless steel.

Main components
- Exhaust pipe
- Heat shield.
Note: The exhaust pipe is considered to be an SRU.
(Shop Replaceable Unit)

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.16

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

EXHAUST SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Non-modular part

EXHAUST
PIPE

HEAT
SHIELD
Reduction
gearbox

Gas temperature:
600C (1080F)

EXHAUST PIPE

Made of stainless steel

HEAT SHIELD
EXHAUST
GAS

HEAT
SHIELD

EXHAUST
PIPE
REDUCTION
GEARBOX

EXHAUST SYSTEM
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

GAS FROM THE


POWER TURBINE

3.17

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Type:
Elliptical

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

REDUCTION GEARBOX

Functional description
- The reduction gear provides a forward output drive at a
reduced speed

Function
The reduction gearbox provides a reduced speed output and
transmits the drive forwards.

- The drive gear is directly driven by the power turbine shaft


(muff coupling drive). It transmits the movement to the
intermediate gear

Position

- The intermediate gear drives the output gear which provides


the power drive.

- At the rear of the engine


- It forms the module M05.

Main characteristics
- Type: 3 stages, helical gears
- Drive gear speed: N2
- Output gear speed: 6000 rpm (except 1S1); CW.
- Gears made of steel

Main components
- Drive gear
- Intermediate gear
- Fork shaped plates
- Output gear
- Casings
- Hydraulic torquemeter.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.18

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

2 FORK
SHAPED PLATES

MUFF
COUPLING

DRIVE GEAR

INTERMEDIATE
GEAR

INTERMEDIATE
GEAR
N2

DRIVE
GEAR

HYDRAULIC
TORQUEMETER

Type:
3 stages, helical gears

100% N1,
CW

OUTPUT GEAR

Drive gear speed:


N2

OUTPUT
GEAR

Output gear speed:


6000 rpm (except 1S1)
Gears made of steel
CASINGS

GENERAL

REDUCTION GEARBOX
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.19

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY


GEARBOX

Driven accessories
- Starter-generator

Function

- Breather

The shaft transmits the power to the helicopter via the power
off-take at the front of the engine.

- N2 tachometer generator

The accessory gearbox provides the drive for the engine


accessories.

- Oil pump

Position

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

- N1 governor
- N2 tachometer generator
- N2 governor.

- Shaft beneath the engine


- Accessory gearbox at the front of the engine
- This assembly forms the module M01.

Main characteristics
- Type of gears:
spur gear
bevel gear.

Main components
- Accessory drive shaft
- Accessory drive train
- Casings.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.20

ENGINE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT
(N1)

Type of gears:
Spur gear
Bevel gear

FRONT
CASING

STARTER-GENERATOR
DRIVE GEAR
BREATHER
GEAR

ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT

REAR
CASING

ACCESSORY
DRIVE TRAIN

N1
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR

N1 GOVERNOR
AND OIL PUMP

TRANSMISSION
SHAFT GEAR

POWER
OFF-TAKE
N2 GOVERNOR AND
N2 TACHOMETER GENERATOR

ACCESSORY
DRIVE GEAR
(N2)

TRANSMISSION
SHAFT

GENERAL

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.21

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TRANSMISSION SHAFT - TWIN-ENGINE


CONFIGURATION

Function

Description
The shaft transmits the power to the power off-take and accessory
gearbox. The shaft is located in a protection tube bolted to the
reduction gearbox at the rear and to the accessory gearbox at
the front.

- Lower part of the engine.

The front of the shaft is supported by a ball bearing in the


accessory gearbox front casing. The triangular flange which
forms the power off-take is splined onto the front of the
transmission shaft and is secured by a nut. Sealing of the oil
which lubricates the bearing is ensured by a magnetic carbon
seal.

Main characteristics

Three oil tubes are located between the shaft and the protection
tube.

The shaft transmits the power to the front power off-take.

Position

Hollow steel shaft.

The rear of the shaft is splined into the hub of the output gear
of the reduction gear.

Main components
- Transmission shaft
- Protection tube
- Accessory drive gear
- Power off-take.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.22

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY


GEARBOX

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

SHAFT

POWER OFF-TAKE
(triangular flange)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

OUTPUT
GEAR

ACCESSORY
DRIVE GEAR

MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL

OIL TUBE

PROTECTION
TUBE
FRONT PART

REAR PART

TRANSMISSION SHAFT - TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.23

ENGINE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TRANSMISSION SHAFT - SINGLE ENGINE


CONFIGURATION

Three oil pipes are located within the protection tube.


A free wheel is mounted on the triangular flange to drive the
power drive shaft which drives the main gearbox and the tail
rotor.

Function
The shaft transmits the power to the front and to the rear of
the engine.

Lubrication of the free wheel and its bearing is by the oil contained
in the free wheel housing, or by the oil system of the engine,
according to the version.

Position:

The rear of the transmission shaft is splined into the hub of the
output gear of the reduction gear.

- Lower part of the engine.

The rear of the tail rotor drive shaft is supported by a ball bearing
in the hub of the output gear. A magnetic carbon seal is fitted
in the rear cover of the gearbox.

Main characteristics
- Hollow steel shaft with coaxial drive shaft.

Note:

Description
The shaft transmits the power to the power drive shaft. The
transmission shaft is located in a protection tube bolted to the
reduction gearbox at the rear and to the accessory gearbox at
the front.

In single-engine configuration the free wheel and


transmission shaft front magnetic carbon seal are
SRU. So they can only be replaced in 2nd Line
maintenance.

The front of the transmission shaft is supported by a ball bearing


in the accessory gearbox front casing. A triangular flange is
splined onto the front of the transmission shaft. Sealing of
the oil which lubricates the bearing is ensured by a magnetic
carbon seal.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.24

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY


GEARBOX

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

SEAL

TRIANGULAR FLANGE

TAIL ROTOR
DRIVE

SHAFT

ACCESSORY
DRIVE GEAR

POWER DRIVE
SHAFT

FREE WHEEL

MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL

MAGNETIC
CARBON
SEAL

OIL TUBE

FRONT PART

REAR PART

TRANSMISSION SHAFT - SINGLE ENGINE CONFIGURATION

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.25

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY


GEARBOX
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION 1


The accessory gearbox has four drives on the front face:
starter-generator (equipped with a magnetic carbon
seal)
fuel control unit N1
fuel control unit N2
power
and mounting bolts on the upper part for attachment of the
M02.
It has 3 power drives on the rear face:
oil pump
N1 tachometer generator
N2 tachometer generator
and the protection tube mounting flange, and the accessory
drive shaft passage on the upper part.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.26

ENGINE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MOUNTING
BOLTS
MAGNETIC
CARBON
SEALS

ACCESSORY
DRIVE SHAFT
PASSAGE (N1)

N1
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR

FUEL CONTROL
UNIT N1 DRIVE

OIL
PUMP
STARTERGENERATOR
DRIVE
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT N2 DRIVE

POWER
DRIVE

PROTECTION
TUBE MOUNTING
FLANGE

N2
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION 1

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.27

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY


GEARBOX
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION 2


The transmission shaft and the accessory box assembly
constitutes the module M01 located at the engine lower part.
The accessory gearbox includes a train of gears housed in
a gearbox formed by two half casings made of light alloy.
The gearbox is installed at the bottom of the axial compressor
by means of four bolts.
The starter-generator gear forms the engine breather.
The fuel control unit N1 gear drives the oil pump at the rear.
The fuel control unit N2 gear is driven by the gear on the
transmission shaft.
The module identification plate is fitted on the front face of the
gearbox.
Note: The engine front support casing is bolted onto the front
face of the accessory gearbox (according to version).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.28

ENGINE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

N1
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR

Startergenerator
mounting
flange

DRIVE SHAFT
(N1)

REAR
CASING

N1 TACHOMETER
GENERATOR

TRANSMISSION
SHAFT GEAR
(N2)

N1 FUEL CONTROL
UNIT AND OIL
PUMP DRIVE
N1 FUEL CONTROL
UNIT AND OIL
PUMP DRIVE

OIL
PUMPS
FRONT
CASING

Identification
plate

N2 FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
AND N2 TACHOMETER
GENERATOR

N2 FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
N2 TACHOMETER
GENERATOR

ACCESSORY GEARBOX - DESCRIPTION 2

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.29

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

STARTERGENERATOR /
BREATHER GEAR

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY


GEARBOX
The operation is considered during engine starting and in
normal running.

The gas generator drives the accessory gear train through the
bevel gear located on the axial compressor shaft.
The following accessories are driven:

Operation during engine starting


During starting, the starter motor drives the accessory gearbox
and thus the gas generator rotating assembly.
The compressors supply air to the combustion chamber and
the starting sequence continues.
At self-sustaining speed the electrical supply to the starter
motor is cut. The starter motor is then mechanically driven by
the engine and operates as a generator to provide DC current
to the aircraft electrical system.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Operation in normal running

- Starter-generator
- FCU: N1 and N2
- Oil pumps
- Tachometer generator: N1 and N2.

Edition: April 2012

3.30

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ACCESSORY GEARBOX - OPERATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FWD
STARTER
MOTOR

FWD
DRIVE
SHAFT

DIRECT CURRENT
GENERATOR

DURING
ENGINE STARTING

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

DRIVE
SHAFT

NORMAL RUNNING
(N1 self-sustaining speed)

ACCESSORY GEARBOX - OPERATION

TRANSMISSION SHAFT AND ACCESSORY GEARBOX


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.31

ENGINE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE - OPERATION

The process comprises compression, combustion, expansion


and the transmission of the power.

Compression
The ambient air is compressed by an axial supercharging
compressor and a centrifugal compressor.

Expansion
- The gas expands in the gas generator turbine which extracts
the energy required to drive the compressors and accessories
(N1 rotation: ACW)
During this phase the pressure and temperature of the gas
drop, whilst the velocity increases.

This phase is essentially characterised by the air flow


(approx. 2.5 kg/s; 5.5 lb/sec.) and the compression ratio (approx.
8.2).

- There is a further expansion in the power turbine which


extracts most of the remaining energy to drive the output
shaft (N2 rotation: CW)
After the power turbine the gas is discharged overboard via
the exhaust pipe, giving a slight residual thrust.

Combustion

Power transmission

The compressed air is admitted into the combustion chamber,


mixed with the fuel and burnt in a continuous process.

The power is transmitted forward by a reduction gearbox and


an external transmission shaft.

The air is divided into two flows:

Note:






- A primary flow for combustion


- A secondary flow for cooling the gas.
This phase is essentially characterised by the temperature rise
(flame temperature of approx. 2500C; 4532F) and a pressure
drop of about 4%.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

The engine reference stations are:


0 - Ambient air
1 - Axial compressor inlet
1' - Axial compressor outlet
2 - Centrifugal compressor outlet
3 - Turbine inlet
4 - Gas generator turbine outlet
5 - Power turbine outlet.

3.32

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

The engine provides power by transforming the energy in the


air and fuel into mechanical energy on a shaft.

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Residual thrust

Secondary air
(dilution air)
Gas

EXHAUST

AIRFLOW
2.5 kg/s
(5.5 lb/s)
Fuel
0

1'

2500
(4532)

101,3
P kPa (14.7)
(PSI)
TC
(F)
V

15
(59)

AMBIENT
AIR

800
(116)

POWER TRANSMISSION

1125
(2057) 880
(1616)

820
(118.9)
160
(23.2)

600
(1080)

300
(43.5)

320
(608)

108
(15.7)

65
(149)

Values given
for information at a
given reference rating

COMPRESSOR

COMBUSTION
CHAMBER

COMPRESSION

COMBUSTION

TURBINES
EXPANSION

ENGINE - OPERATION
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

(power transmitted forward


by a reduction gearbox and
an external shaft)

Edition: April 2012

3.33

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Primary air
(combustion air)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

Recommended maintenance tasks

- After the last flight of the day

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- Before the first flight of the day


- Pre-flight
- Post-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.34

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

SERVICING INSPECTIONS

MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS

AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS


- Make sure there are no foreign objects (air intake)
- Inspection of the axial compressor wheel (impacts)
- Rotating assembly turns freely, listen for abnormal
noises (rub)
- Visually check that there are no external leaks
- Condition of the accessories attachments
- Visual inspection (no cracks) of casings, diffuser and
exhaust pipe
IMPERATIVE MAINTENANCE TASKS
- Check for abnormal noises during gas generator
rundown
- Make sure that the gas generator rotates freely (when
T4 < 150C) (pre TU202)
- Condition and attachment of the engine and of the front
support (no craks)
- Record C1 and C2 cycles in the engine log book
- Consistency check (cycles counter)
Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

- Blades of the axial compressor


Inspection

Chap. 72

- Combustion chamber
Inspection

Chap. 72

- Gas generator turbine 1st stage


Borecope inpsection

Chap. 72

- 3 hollow struts for the passage of the rearbearing oil-tubes


Vrification

Chap. 72

- Attachments, pipes and supports


Inspection and check

Chap. 70

Ground run
Do a vibration check at rear point

Chap. 71

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE TASKS


- Cleaning of the air path
Frequency
- Blades of the power turbine (pre TU347)
Check
- Exhaust pipe and heat shield
Inspection and check

Chap. 71
Chap. 72
Chap. 72

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.35

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.36

ENGINE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- Free wheel shaft assembly


Removal / installation
Rear shaft output seal: removal /
installation
Sealing ring: removal
- Magnetic seal of the starter
Removal / installation
- Seal of the fuel control unit adapter
Removal / installation
- Seal of the accessory gearbox/FT
Removal / installation
- Seal of the tachometer transmitter
Removal / installation
- Magnetic seal of the transmission shaft
Replacement

Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

ENGINE - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

3.37

ENGINE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

4 - OIL SYSTEM
- Oil system presentation (79-00-00)..................................................... 4.2
- Oil tank - Oil cooler - Oil pressure transmitter................................... 4.6
- Oil pumps (72-80-02)............................................................................. 4.8
- Oil filter(72-80-03)................................................................................. 4.10
- Oil filter pre-blockage indicator (72-80-03)......................................... 4.14
- Low oil pressure switch (79-31-00)..................................................... 4.16
- Electrical magnetic plugs (72-38-00)................................................... 4.18
- Mechanical magnetic plugs (72-80-04)............................................... 4.20
- Scavenge strainers (72-80-05)............................................................. 4.22
- Centrifugal breather (72-10-01)............................................................ 4.24
- Oil system - Operation (72-80-00)........................................................ 4.26
- Oil pipes and ducts (72-80-06)............................................................. 4.28
- Oil system - 1st line maintenance....................................................... 4.30 - 4.33
(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.1

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


Lubrication requirements

Function

Lubrication is required for the following components:

The oil system ensures lubrication and cooling of the engine.

- Gas generator front bearings


Axial compressor bearing
Centrifugal compressor bearing
Accessory drive bearing

Position
All the components are fitted on the engine except the tank
and cooler.

- Gas generator rear bearing


- Power turbine bearings

Main characteristics
- System type: variable pressure, full flow, dry sump, synthetic
oil
- Max. oil temperature: 115C (239F)

- Reduction gearbox
- Accessory drive gearbox.

Sealing

- Min. oil pressure: 90 or 130 kPa (13 or 18.85 PSIG)


according to version

Gas generator and power turbine bearings are sealed by


pressurised labyrinths, which are provided with abradable
deposits.

- Max. oil pressure: 800 kPa (116 PSIG)


- Max. oil consumption: 0.3 l/h or 0.15 l/h according to
version.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.2

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

GAS GENERATOR

POWER TURBINE
REAR
BEARING

FRONT
BEARINGS

FRONT
BEARING

REAR
BEARINGS

Engine lubrication
and cooling
Type:
Variable pressure, full flow,
dry sump, synthetic oil
Max. oil temperature:
115C (239F)
Min. oil pressure:
90 or 130 kPa
(13 or 18.85 PSIG)
according to version
Max. oil pressure:
800 kPa (116 PSIG)
Max. oil consumption:
0.3 l/h or 0.15 l/h
according to version

BEARINGS

GEARS

BEARINGS

ACCESSORY DRIVE GEARBOX

GEARS
REDUCTION GEARBOX

Sealing:
Gas generator and power turbine bearings are sealed by pressurised
labyrinths, which are provided with abradable deposits.

GENERAL

OIL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.3

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


Check valve (general oil return line to oil tank)

Oil tank
The tank contains the volume of oil required to lubricate the
engine. It is supplied by the aircraft manufacturer.

Oil pumps
The pump pack contains one pressure pump and three scavenge
pumps. The gear type pumps are driven by the accessory
gearbox. The pressure pump is equipped with a pressure relief
valve and in some versions a check valve.

Oil filter
The filter retains any particles which may be present in the oil. It is
provided with a by-pass valve and a pre-blockage indicator.

Scavenge strainers
The scavenge strainers protect the scavenge pumps from
debris in the system.

Magnetic plugs

A check valve is fitted downstream of the scavenge pumps, on


the general oil return line to the oil tank.

Oil cooler
The oil cooler cools the oil. It is supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer.

Centrifugal breather
The centrifugal breather separates the oil from the air/oil mist
and vents the system.

Indicating devices
-
-
-
-
-
-

Oil temperature probe (aircraft manufacturer's supply)


Pre-blockage indicator
Low oil pressure switch
Pressure transmitter
Magnetic plugs
Electrical magnetic plugs.

Mechanical magnetic plugs are fitted upstream of the scavenge


pumps. An electrical magnetic plug is fitted at the general
scavenge outlet, another one at the rear bearing of the gas
generator scavenge.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.4

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

DESCRIPTION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Check valve
(some versions)

Oil
temperature
probe

TANK
COOLER

Low oil
pressure switch

ENGINE

Pressure
Relief
valve

Check
valve

Electrical
magnetic plug

CENTRIFUGAL
BREATHER

Pre-blockage
indicator

By-pass
valve

Scavenge
pumps

Pressure
transmitter
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

AIRFRAME

Pressure
pump

FILTER

Magnetic
plug

Electrical
magnetic plug

OIL PUMPS

Magnetic
plug

SCAVENGE
STRAINERS

DESCRIPTION

OIL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.5

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Oil tank

Main characteristics
- Type: air-oil cooler
- Differential and thermostatic by-pass valve

Function
The tank contains the oil required for engine lubrication.

Oil pressure transmitter

Position

Function

- On the aircraft: it is installed with the oil cooler above the


plenum chamber, between the main gearbox and the front
firewall.

The transmitter provides a signal of oil pressure to the instrument


panel.

Main components
- Filler cap, level indicator, drain plug (with magnetic plug),
temperature probe and unions (supply, return and vent).

Position
- In the system: in the supply system, downstream of the
filter
- On the engine: screwed into the filter base.

Main characteristics

Oil cooler

- Output signal: voltage proportional to the oil pressure.

Function
The oil cooler cools the oil after it has passed through the engine.

Position

Note: All these components are aircraft manufacturer's


supplies. Refer to aircraft manufacturer documentation.

- In the system: between the scavenge pumps and the tank


- On the aircraft: it is installed on the oil tank above the plenum
chamber between the main gearbox and the front firewall.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.6

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OIL TANK - OIL COOLER - OIL PRESSURE


TRANSMITTER

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Aircraft manufacturers
supplies. For further details,
refer to the aircraft
documentation.
AIRFRAME

OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER


Electrical
signal to the
cockpit

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ENGINE

OIL TANK

OIL COOLER

OIL TANK - OIL COOLER - OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.7

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL PUMPS
- The pressure relief valve

Function

- The check valve (according to version).

Position

Operation

- On the engine: the pump pack is mounted on the rear face


of the accessory gearbox.

The pressure pump draws the oil from the tank and pumps it
to the filter.

Main characteristics

The scavenge pumps draw the oil from the casings and pump
it to the cooler.

- Type: gear
- Pressure pump outlet pressure: approx. 300 kPa (43.5 PSI)
(variable pressure system)
- Pressure relief valve setting: 800 kPa (116 PSI)
- Check valve: according to version.

Description
The oil pump pack is mounted on the rear left face of the accessory
gearbox and is driven at a speed proportional to N1.
It consists of:
- 4 gear type pumps:
Pressure pump
Gas generator rear bearing scavenge pump
Reduction gearbox scavenge pump
Accessory gearbox scavenge pump

Pressure relief valve operation


If the oil pressure exceeds the valve setting the valve opens
and allows the oil to return to the pump inlet.
In normal operation the valve is closed and only opens
in exceptional circumstances, e.g. starting with very low
temperature.

Pressure pump outlet check valve operation


When the oil pressure is very low, e.g. engine stopped or at the
beginning of start, the valve is closed in order to prevent flow
between the oil pressure pump and the oil system.

- The pump casing provided with inlet and outlet orifices

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.8

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

The pumps ensure oil circulation.

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Check valve
(according
to version)

Pressure
relief valve

From oil tank

PACK OF
PUMPS

Type:
Gear

Oil filter

Pressure pump outlet pressure:


Approx. 300 kPa (43.5 PSI)
(variable pressure system)

To lubrication

To oil
cooler

From
engine

Pressure relief valve setting:


800 kPa (116 PSI)
Check valve:
According to version
Normal
running condition
(valve closed)
Overpressure
(valve open)

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE OPERATION


Scavenge
pumps

Pressure
pump

OIL PUMPS
DRIVE SHAFT

Normal
running condition
(valve open)
Engine stopped
and initial phase
of starting
(valve closed)

PUMP BODY

PRESSURE PUMP OUTLET CHECK


VALVE OPERATION

OIL PUMPS
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.9

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL FILTER
Main components

Function

- Filter base

The filter retains particles that may be in the oil.

- Pre-blockage indicator (pre-blockage pressure switch on


1E version)

Position

- Cover

- In the system: downstream of the pressure pump

- By-pass valve.

- On the engine: on the left rear face of the accessory


gearbox.

Main characteristics
- Type: metal cartridge
- Filtering ability: 30 microns
- Mechanical pre-blockage indicator: P 150 kPa
(21.7PSID)
- By-pass valve setting: P 200 kPa (29 PSID).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.10

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FILTER
BASE

PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
(pre-blockage
pressure switch
on 1E version)

BY-PASS
VALVE

Type:
Metal cartridge
Filtering ability:
30 microns
Mechanical pre-blockage
indicator:
P 150 kPa (21.7 PSID)

Pressure
relief valve

Check valve
(according
to version)

Pre-blockage
indicator

To lubrication

From oil tank

By-pass valve setting:


P 200 kPa (29 PSID)
By-pass valve

FILTER

GENERAL

OIL FILTER
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.11

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

COVER

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL FILTER
Operation

Description

Normal condition (filtering)

The main components of the filtering unit are the following:

The oil supplied by the pressure pump passes through the


filter from outside to inside. The filtered oil then passes to the
engine for lubrication.

- Filter base
- Filter cover

Pre-blockage

- Metal cartridge (filtering element)

If the filter begins to become blocked the pressure difference


across the filter increases. At a given difference, a red mechanical
indicator pops out. The oil continues to flow through the filter.

- By-pass valve (fitted inside the filter base)


- Drain valve.
The filter base incorporates mounting points for the following:
- Pre-blockage indicator

Blockage
If the pressure difference exceeds the by-pass valve setting, the
by-pass valve opens and unfiltered oil passes to the system.

- Low oil pressure switch


- Oil pressure transmitter.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.12

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

DESCRIPTION - OPERATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

FILTER
COVER

FILTERING
ELEMENT

LOW OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH

PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR

OIL PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER

BY-PASS
VALVE
NORMAL CONDITION
OPERATION OF
THE MECHANICAL
PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR

PRE-BLOCKAGE

BY-PASS
VALVE

DRAIN
VALVE

FILTER
BASE

PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
BLOCKAGE

OPERATION OF THE
BY-PASS VALVE

DESCRIPTION - OPERATION

OIL FILTER

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.13

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OIL FILTER
(filtering 30 microns)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL FILTER PRE-BLOCKAGE INDICATOR


Operation

The indicator indicates the onset of filter blockage.

Normal operation

Position

Filter downstream pressure plus spring pressure is greater


than upstream pressure. The two pistons are held together by
magnetic force. The indicator is not visible.

On the left face of the filter housing.

Main characteristics
-
-
-
-

Pre-blockage

Type: differential
Setting: P 150 kPa (21.7 PSID)
Indication: red indicator
Manual rearming.

Filter upstream pressure exceeds downstream plus spring


pressure and the P piston displaces.
This breaks the magnetic hold and the indicator piston is pushed
out by its spring. The indicator is visible.

Description

The bi-metallic thermal lock ensures that the indicator doesn't


operate when a large P is caused by low temperature (locked
below 50C (122F)).

The pre-blockage indicator comprises the following parts:


- Indicator body including:
Filter upstream pressure inlet
Filter downstream pressure inlet
- Red indicator piston
- P piston
- Transparent cover
- Thermal lock
- O'ring seals ensure the filter pre-blockage indicator sealing.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

It is rearmed by removing the cover and pushing in the


indicator.
Note: In the 1E version, the filter pre-blockage indicator is
replaced by a filter pre-blockage pressure switch.

Edition: April 2012

4.14

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

INDICATOR
BODY

< 50C (122F)

> 50C (122F)

Thermal lock
operation

Downstream
pressure

Type:
Differential

RED
INDICATOR

Setting:
P 150 kPa (21.7 PSID)

Upstream
pressure
NORMAL OPERATION

Indication:
Red indicator
Manual rearming
Pressure
relief valve

From oil tank

Check valve
(according
to version)

PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR

Red indicator
out
Downstream
pressure

To lubrication

Upstream
pressure
PRE-BLOCKAGE

OIL FILTER PRE-BLOCKAGE INDICATOR


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.15

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TRANSPARENT
COVER

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

LOW OIL PRESSURE SWITCH


The low oil pressure switch detects low oil system pressure
and provides cockpit indication.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function

Position
- In the system: downstream of the filter
- On the engine: fitted on the filter base.

Main characteristics
- Type: diaphragm pressure switch
- Setting: 90 or 130 kPa (13 or 18.9 PSI) (according to
version)
- Indication: light on instrument panel.

Functional description
The pressure switch microswitch is open during normal engine
operation.
If the oil pressure reduces to less than the low oil pressure
switch setting, the diaphragm moves down. This causes the
electrical contact to close, completing the circuit of the low oil
pressure warning light.
An O-ring seal ensures the sealing between the pressure switch
and the filter base.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.16

OIL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

ELECTRICAL
CONTACT

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

LOW OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH

From filter
(pressure pump)
WARNING LIGHT
(instrument panel)

+28 VCC

PLUNGER
DIAPHRAGM

From filter

Type:
Diaphragm pressure switch
Setting:
90 or 130 kPa
(13 or 18.9 PSI)
according to version
Indication:
Light on instrument panel

To lubrication

LOW OIL PRESSURE SWITCH


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.17

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ELECTRICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS

The electrical magnetic plugs provide a cockpit indication of


metal particles in the oil system.

Position

The plugs are fitted into a housing which is provided with a


self-sealing valve.
The scavenge oil flows across the magnetic probe.

- In the system:
one downstream of the scavenge pumps
one upstream of the rear bearing scavenge pump
- On the engine:
one near the pump assembly (scavenge pumps)
one on the left side of the accessory gearbox
(rear bearing).

Main characteristics

Note: The oil system also has two mechanical magnetic plugs
located on the lower part of the accessory gearbox and
on the lower part of the reduction gearbox.

Operation
The magnetic probe attracts magnetic particles present in the
oil.
If it attracts sufficient particles to form a bridge across the gap, this
will complete the electrical circuit between the two magnetic parts
and thus illuminate an indicator on the instrument panel.

- Type:
Magnetic with electrical indication
Self-sealing housing.

The resistor is fitted to allow the installation of a test circuit.

Description
The electrical magnetic plugs comprise a magnetic probe which
has two parts which are electrically insulated from one another
and have a small gap between them.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

A resistor is connected across the gap. The plugs are connected,


via the engine electrical harness, to the aircraft instrument panel
with an optional test system.

Note: Refer to aircraft documents for further details.

Edition: April 2012

4.18

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Type:
Electrical
magnetic plug
Housing:
Self-sealing

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

PLUG BODY

Scavenge
strainer
To oil
cooler

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

From
engine
GAP

ELECTRICAL
MAGNETIC PLUG

Scavenge pumps

Firewall

AIRCRAFT

Resistor

HOUSING

ENGINE
GAP

SELF-SEALING
VALVE
INDICATOR
ELECTRICAL
MAGNETIC PLUG

ELECTRICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.19

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Main components

The mechanical magnetic plugs retain magnetic particles


contained in the oil to provide a rapid and frequent check of
the internal condition of the engine.

- Self sealing housing:


Housing
O-ring seal
Valve
Spring

Position
In the system:

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MECHANICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS

- Magnetic plug:
Magnet
O-ring seal(s)
Locating pins or notches.

- One on the reduction gearbox scavenge return


- One on the accessory gearbox scavenge return.
On the engine:
- One at the bottom of the reduction gearbox
- One at the bottom of the accessory gearbox.
They are mounted on the left or the right side according to the
position of the engine in the helicopter.

Main characteristics
- Type:
Single magnetic pole
Self-sealing housing

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.20

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

LOCATING PINS

O-RING SEALS
O-RING
SEALS
HOUSING

AFTER TU 308A
BEFORE TU 308A

MAGNET

Type:
Single magnetic pole
Self-sealing housing

NORMAL POSITION
SPRING

MAGNET

To
scavenge
pumps

MECHANICAL
MAGNETIC
PLUGS

LOCATING
PIN

REMOVED POSITION

MECHANICAL MAGNETIC PLUGS


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

O-RING
SEALS

Edition: April 2012

4.21

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

VALVE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Main components

The scavenge strainers protect the scavenge pumps against


large particles which might be in the oil.

- Strainer body

Position

- Mounting flange

- In the system: they are fitted in each scavenge line upstream


of the scavenge pump

- O-ring seal.

- On the engine:
Two scavenge strainers are located on the accessory
gearbox casing (reduction gearbox and accessory
gearbox scavenge)
One scavenge strainer is located on the oil pump
assembly (gas generator rear bearing scavenge)

Functional description

- Wide-mesh filter

A scavenge strainer is a wide-mesh filter which retains any large


particles which may be present in the oil in order to protect the
scavenge pumps.

Main characteristics
- Type: wide-mesh filter.
Note: The rear bearing scavenge strainer is fitted in the
electrical magnetic plug housing (TU 208).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.22

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

SCAVENGE STRAINERS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Type:
Wide-mesh filter

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Gas generator rear bearing


scavenge strainer

GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
SCAVENGE STRAINER
(AFTER TU 208)
Accessory gearbox
scavenge strainer

Reduction gearbox
scavenge strainer
SCAVENGE STRAINER

To oil
cooler

From
engine

ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
AND REDUCTION
GEARBOX
SCAVENGE
STRAINERS

GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
SCAVENGE STRAINER
(BEFORE TU 208)

To
scavenge
pumps
SCAVENGE
STRAINERS

SCAVENGE STRAINERS
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.23

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Operation

The centrifugal breather separates the oil from the air/oil mist
created by the oil system.

The centrifugal breather is driven by the intermediate gear of


the accessory drive.

Position

When the engine is running, the air/oil mist passes through


the breather.

It is formed by the starter/generator drive gear in the accessory


gearbox.

- Centrifugal force throws the oil droplets out into the gearbox
where they fall to the bottom of the casing

Main characteristics

- The de-oiled air passes out through the shaft, via a gearbox
passage, into an external pipe which discharges into the
exhaust.

- Type: centrifugal
- De-oiled air: through the rear of the hollow shaft.

Description
The centrifugal breather is formed by the starter generator drive
gear. This gear is formed in one piece with a hollow shaft and
has holes which provide a passage between the gearbox and
the air vent.
The gear is supported by two ball bearings and has a magnetic
carbon seal at each end. Only the front magnetic carbon seal
can be replaced in 1st line maintenance.
The breather air outlet is at the rear end of the shaft, where the
air passes into the gearbox outlet.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.24

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CENTRIFUGAL BREATHER

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Type:
Centrifugal
De-oiled air:
Through the rear
of the hollow shaft

Oil droplets
(expelled by
centrifugal force)

AIR/OIL MIST
- from accessory gearbox
- from gas generator bearings
- from power turbine bearings
- from reduction gearbox

MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL

STARTERGENERATOR
DRIVE GEAR

AIR VENT
DE-OILED AIR

De-oiled air
(to air vent)

STARTER
GENERATOR
DRIVE

Air/Oil
mist

BREATHER
HOLES

OIL DROPLETS

CENTRIFUGAL BREATHER
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

MAGNETIC
CARBON SEAL

Edition: April 2012

4.25

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL SYSTEM - OPERATION

Supply
The pressure pump draws the oil from the tank and supplies
the system. A pressure relief valve limits maximum pressure
by returning oil to the pump inlet.
The oil is then delivered through a check valve, the oil filter
and a calibrated orifice to the engine sections which require
lubrication:
- Gas generator front bearings

Scavenge
After lubrication, the oil falls by gravity to the bottom of the
sumps. The oil is then immediately drawn away by the scavenge
pumps and returned to the tank through the oil cooler (dry sump
system).
The scavenge strainers protect the scavenge pumps against
any particles which may be held in the oil.
A check valve, located downstream the scavenge pumps
prevents oil flow from the oil tank to the engine when the pressure
is very low (engine stopped).

- Gas generator rear bearing

Breathing

- Power turbine bearings

The oil mist which results from lubrication is returned to the


accessory gearbox, where the oil is separated from the air by
a centrifugal breather which vents overboard.

- Reduction gearbox
- Accessory gearbox and torquemeter (supply upstream of the
calibrated orifice).
The oil is sprayed by jets onto the parts to be lubricated.

The gas generator rear bearing has a direct air vent.

Indicating
The system ensures the following indications: pressure,
temperature, low pressure, electrical magnetic plug and filter
pre-blockage.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.26

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

The main functions of the oil system are: supply, scavenge,


breathing and indicating.

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
ENGINE

SUPPLY

SCAVENGE

BREATHING

OIL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

AIRFRAME

AIR VENT

4.27

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL PIPES AND DUCTS


Supply to the power turbine bearings and
reduction gearbox

Main characteristics

- Internal passage
- Tube inside the output shaft protection tube.

- Type of pipes: stainless steel, rigid.

Accessory gearbox supply


- Internal passages.

Tank to pressure pump

Scavenge, engine front end


- Internal passages.

- Flexible pipeline supplied by the aircraft manufacturer

Scavenge, gas generator rear bearing

- Union on the pressure pump.

- External pipe
- Union on pump.

Pressure pump to filter

Scavenge, engine rear part (power turbine


and reduction gear)

- Internal passage in the casing.

Filter to system

- Tube within output shaft protection tube


- Internal passages.

- Internal passage in the accessory gearbox casing.

Supply to the gas generator front bearings


- External pipe
- Union on the compressor casing.

Supply to the gas generator rear bearing


- External pipe.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Breathing
- Gas generator front bearings - into accessory gearbox
- Gas generator rear bearing - external pipe overboard
- Reduction gearbox and power turbine - internal into accessory
gearbox.

Vent

- External pipe from centrifugal breather to the exhaust pipe


- External pipe from gas generator rear bearing overboard.

Edition: April 2012

4.28

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

This description includes external pipes and internal passages


of the oil system.

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
TO
INDICATION

REAR BEARING
LUBRIFICATION

Type of pipes:
Stainless steel, rigid
REAR BEARING
SEAL DRAIN

TANK
PUMP
TO PUMP TO FILTER

BREATHER

REAR BEARING
VENT

LUBRIFICATION OIL RETURN FROM


LINE
REAR BEARING
REAR BEARING
BREATHING

CENTRIFUGAL
BREATHER OUTLET

SCAVENGE TO
COOLER AND TANK

OIL PIPES AND DUCTS


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

FILTER
TO ENGINE

SCAVENGE
TO PUMPS

4.29

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FRONT BEARING
LUBRIFICATION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

Recommended maintenance tasks

- After the last flight of the day

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- Before the first flight of the day


- Pre-flight
- Post-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.30

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

SERVICING INSPECTIONS

MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS

AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS


- Examine the visual pre-blockage indicator of the oil
filtering element
- Check the reduction gearbox magnetic plug (pre TU232)
- Make sure the oil level is correct

- Oil
Drain
Chap. 79
- Oil filtering element
Chap. 72
Inspection
- Reduction gearbox magnetic plug (post TU232)
Chap. 72
Inspection
- Accessory gearbox magnetic plug
Chap. 72
Inspection
- Electrical magnetic plugs
Chap. 72
Inspection
- Oil strainer return line from rear bearing
Chap. 72
Inspection
Chap. 79
Inspection
- Clogging of the generator rear bearing
Chap. 72
Inspection
- Low oil pressure switch
Chap. 79
Inspection and check
- Oil pump
Chap. 72
Inspection and check

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.31

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.32

OIL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- Accessory gearbox
Check valve: removal / installation
Oil filter base: removal / installation
Oil pump: removal / installation
Oil filter: removal / installation
Visual pre-blocage indicator: removal /
installation
Strainers: removal / installation
- Oil low pressure switch
Removal / installation
- Electrical magnetic plug
Mobile plug: removal / installation
Test (harness included)

Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 72
Chap. 79
Chap. 79

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

OIL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

4.33

OIL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

5 - AIR SYSTEM
- Air system presentation (75-00-00)..................................................... 5.2
- Internal air system (75-00-00).............................................................. 5.4
- Air tappings (75-00-00)......................................................................... 5.6
- Compressor bleed valve (75-31-00)..................................................... 5.8
- External air pipes (75-29-00)................................................................ 5.16
- Air system - 1st line maintenance....................................................... 5.18 - 5.21

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.1

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

AIR SYSTEM PRESENTATION

The engine air system includes:

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function
- An internal air system which ensures:
The pressurisation of the labyrinth seals
The cooling of the engine internal parts
The balance of forces on the rotating assemblies
- Air tappings which ensure:
Start injector ventilation
Bleed valve operation
Aircraft air system supply
Air supply to the FCU metering unit
- The compressor bleed valve.
Note: Refer to the various systems for the location,
characteristics and operation.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.2

AIR SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

AIR TAPPINGS
- Start injector ventilation
- Bleed valve operation
- Aircraft air system supply
- Air supply to the FCU metering unit

INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM


- Pressurisation of labyrinth seals
- Cooling of internal parts
- Balance of forces on the rotating assemblies

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

COMPRESSOR BLEED
VALVE

AIR SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.3

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM


Gas generator section

The internal air system pressurises the labyrinth seals, cools


certain parts and provides a balancing of forces.

Position
All the parts of the system are internal except the pressurisation
of the power turbine labyrinth which is supplied by an external
pipe.

Main characteristics
- Type: air pressure tapping with a calibrated flow

The air from the centrifugal compressor outlet flows through


the hollow nozzle guide vanes (1ststage) and through holes
in the shroud. It is used to:
- Cool the nozzle guide vane and the front face of the gas
generator turbine
- Cool the front and rear faces of the gas generator turbines
(discharging into the gas flow)
- Pressurise the labyrinth seals of the gas generator rear
bearing (small flow into the bearing housing) and the injection
wheel.
The centrifugal compressor casing is fitted with air tapping
points. This air is called clean air as it is out of the main air
flow stream.

- Airflow: approx. 2% of the engine total flow.

Functional description

Power turbine section

Front section
Air tapped from the centrifugal compressor inlet is used to
pressurise the front bearing labyrinths. There is a very small
flow of air into the bearing chamber.
Air tapped from the same point is discharged through the
compressor bleed valve, mounted on the compressor casing
(see compressor bleed valve).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Air tapped from the centrifugal compressor is used to pressurise


the labyrinth seal on the shaft.

Air tapped from the combustion chamber is taken by an external


pipe to the reduction gearbox casing (except on post TU356 1E2
and 1S versions: the air is tapped from the compressor bleed
valve control air tapping union). It then passes through internal
passages to pressurise the labyrinth seal on the power turbine
shaft and to cool the rear face of the power turbine.
A circulation of P0 air, induced by venturi effect, cools the gas
generator rear bearing chamber, and then flows through the
power turbine nozzle guide vanes, cooling them and then joins
the gas flow.

Edition: April 2012

5.4

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Post TU356
1E2 and 1S versions
P0

FRONT SECTION
INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM

GAS GENERATOR SECTION


Post TU356
1E2 and 1S versions

External pipe for the power turbine


labyrinth pressurisation

- Internal passages
- Calibrated orifices

Type:
Air pressure tapping with
a calibrated flow
Airflow:
Approx. 2% of engine total flow
POWER TURBINE SECTION

INTERNAL AIR SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.5

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Aircraft services

Air tappings are used for:

Compressor delivery air is tapped off for use in various aircraft


systems.

- Fuel control

The engine has two air tapping unions (used for the aircraft
services) on the centrifugal compressor casing.

- Start injector ventilation


- Aircraft services

Note: The use of this bleed is restricted during take-off.

- Bleed valve operation


- Air intake anti-icing.

Bleed valve operation

Fuel control

Compressor delivery air is tapped to operate the compressor


bleed valve.

P2 air is used for the acceleration control unit (for all versions) and
the deceleration (in some versions 1C, 1D, 1K, 1E, 1S,...).

Air intake anti-icing

The system includes a pressure tapping and a pipe between


the tapping union and the FCU.

Start injector ventilation

1S: P2 air is used for air intake anti-icing.


The system includes an air tapping point, a pipeline which passes
forward through the front firewall, an electro-valve, a pressure
switch and the double skinned air intake duct.

Compressor delivery air is used to ventilate the start injectors


to avoid blockage by the carbonisation of unburnt fuel.
The system comprises a tapping union and a pipe connected
to the start electro-valve.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.6

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

AIR TAPPINGS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ACCELERATION
CONTROL UNIT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

DECELERATION
CONTROL UNIT
AIRCRAFT SERVICES
1S: AIR INTAKE
ANTI-ICING
P0

P0

P2

SIGNAL FOR THE


FUEL CONTROL

P2

BLEED VALVE
OPERATION

AIR TAPPINGS
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

START INJECTOR
VENTILATION

5.7

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


Principle

Function
The compressor bleed valve prevents axial compressor surge
at low N1 speed.

Position

The valve prevents compressor surge by bleeding off a certain


quantity of air tapped from the axial compressor outlet. When the
valve is open, the discharge of air causes the air flow through
the axial compressor to increase thus moving the working line
away from the surge line.

- In the system: between the axial and centrifugal


compressors
- On the engine: at the top of the counter-casing.

Main characteristics
- Type: pneumatic or electro-pneumatic (according to
version)
- Control:
by P2/P0 pressure ratio (pneumatic type)
as a function of N1 (electro-pneumatic type).
Note: The air can be discharged under the cowling in order
to improve cooling of the engine compartment.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.8

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Type:
Pneumatic or electro-pneumatic
(according to version)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Control:
- P2/P0 pressure ratio
(pneumatic type)
- As a function of N1
(electro-pneumatic type)
P1': AIR DISCHARGED
THROUGH THE COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE

P2/P0

COMPRESSION AND
STRAIGHTENING OF THE AIR

Surge line

ADMISSION
OF AMBIENT AIR

Working line
(valve closed)

Working line
(valve open)
G

GENERAL

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.9

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


Operation

Description

Closing

This compressor bleed valve includes 3 main parts: the


tachometer box, the control electro-valve and the bleed
valve.

When the N1 reaches 96% the tachometer box closes the


electrical contact which actuates the control electro-valve to
the open position. P2 pressure pushes the piston which closes
the bleed valve.

Tachometer box
It operates a relay controlled by a speed signal from the N1
tachometer transmitter.

Control electro-valve
It admits P2 air to close the valve when it is electrically
supplied.

Opening
When the N1 decreases below 94%, the tachometer box opens
the electrical contact and the spring moves the electro-valve to
the closed position. The spring pushes the piston which opens
the bleed valve.

Bleed valve
It includes a spring loaded piston subjected to P2 pressure.
The piston operates the valve.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.10

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC TYPE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

TACHOMETER BOX

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

BLEED VALVE

P2

P1'

N1
96%

P2 AIR
SUPPLY

94%
GRILL ON P1'
AIR DISCHARGE

CONTROL
ELECTRO-VALVE

ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC TYPE

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.11

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


The compressor bleed valve includes 3 main parts: the detection
capsule, the intermediate stage and the bleed valve.

Detection capsule
It is subjected to P2/P0 pressure ratio and controls the air leak
downstream of the calibrated orifice B.
It is fitted with a filter at the inlet.

Operation
Closing
When the gas generator rotation speed N1 increases, the
compression ratio P2/P0 increases and beyond a certain
value:
- The pressure becomes sufficient to deform the detection
capsule which closes the leak
- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice B
increases

Intermediate stage
It includes a diaphragm which is subjected to the pressure
downstream of B. The diaphragm controls the leak which
determines the pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice
A.

- The diaphragm of the intermediate stage closes the leak


- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice A
increases
- The piston moves down under P2 pressure and the valve
closes and stops the P1' air discharge.

Bleed valve
It includes a spring loaded piston subjected to a downstream
pressure. The piston opens or closes the P1' air passage.
It also includes a microswitch, operated by the piston, which
provides indication of the bleed valve position.

Opening
The P2/P0 ratio is not sufficient to activate the capsule and
there is an air leak downstream of the calibrated orifices. The
piston is not actuated and the valve is open.
A certain amount of air, tapped from the centrifugal compressor
inlet, is discharged overboard.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.12

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PNEUMATIC TYPE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

BLEED
VALVE

INTERMEDIATE
STAGE

DETECTION
CAPSULE

FILTER

P2
A

INTERMEDIATE
STAGE

DETECTION
CAPSULE
FILTER

P0
P1'

P1'

MICROSWITCH

INDICATOR
BLEED
VALVE

PNEUMATIC TYPE

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.13

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


Operation

Description

Closing

The compressor bleed valve includes 3 main parts: the detection


capsule, the intermediate stage and the bleed valve.

When the gas generator rotation speed N1 increases, the


compression ratio P2/P0 increases and beyond a certain
value:

Detection capsule
It is subjected to P2/P0 pressure ratio and controls the air leak
downstream of the calibrated orifice B.

- The pressure becomes sufficient to deform the detection


capsule which closes the leak

It is fitted with a filter at the inlet.

- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice B


increases

Intermediate stage

- The diaphragm of the intermediate stage closes the leak

It includes a diaphragm which is subjected to the pressure


downstream of B. The diaphragm controls the leak which
determines the pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice
A.

- The pressure downstream of the calibrated orifice A


increases

Bleed valve
It includes a spring loaded piston subjected to pressure
downstream of orifice A. The piston actuates the butterfly valve
by means of a rack and pinion mechanism.
It also includes a microswitch, operated by the piston, which
gives the position of the bleed valve by means of a light ("on"
valve "open").

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

- The piston moves down under P2 pressure and rotates the


butterfly valve through the rack and pinion mechanism. The
valve closes and stops the air discharge.

Opening
The P2/P0 ratio is not sufficient to activate the capsules and
there is an air leak downstream of the calibrated orifices. The
piston is not actuated and the butterfly valve is open.
A certain amount of air, tapped from the centrifugal compressor
inlet, is discharged overboard.

Edition: April 2012

5.14

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

BUTTERFLY PNEUMATIC TYPE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

P2 AIR

BUTTERFLY
VALVE
A

FILTER

B
FILTER

PISTON

P0 AIR

P2 air

MICROSWITCH

DETECTION
CAPSULE
INTERMEDIATE
STAGE
P1

P1

BUTTERFLY
VALVE

PINION
RACK

BUTTERFLY PNEUMATIC TYPE

COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.15

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MICROSWITCH

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

EXTERNAL AIR PIPES

Function

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

This part considers the external air pipes of the air system.

The air pipes ensure the air supply from/to the various system
components

Main characteristics
- Type of pipes: stainless steel, rigid
- Type of unions: QUINSON union.

Description
- P2 air pipe for the control of the compressor bleed valve
- Air pipe to supply the Fuel Control Unit
- Air pipe for the ventilation of the start injectors
- Air pipe for the pressurisation of the power turbine
labyrinth.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.16

AIR SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

P2 AIR PIPE FOR THE


COMPRESSOR BLEED
VALVE CONTROL

AIR PIPE TO SUPPLY


THE FUEL CONTROL UNIT

AIR PIPE FOR THE


PRESSURISATION OF THE
POWER TURBINE LABYRINTH
(except 1E2-1S)

AIR PIPE FOR THE


PRESSURISATION OF THE
POWER TURBINE LABYRINTH
(1E2-1S)

AIR PIPE FOR THE VENTILATION


OF THE START INJECTORS

Type of pipes:
Stainless steel, rigid
Type of unions:
QUINSON union

EXTERNAL AIR PIPES


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.17

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

Recommended maintenance tasks

- After the last flight of the day

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- Before the first flight of the day


- Pre-flight
- Post-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.18

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

AIR SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS
- Bleed valve filter
Inspection

Chap. 75

- Power turbine / P2 union


Cleaning
Inspection and check

Chap. 75
Chap. 75

- Opening and closing threshold of the bleed


valve
Test

Chap. 75

- Bleed valve
Inspection and check

Chap. 75

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

AIR SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.19

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

AIR SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.20

AIR SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- Pipes and unions


Removal / installation
- Bleed valve
Removal / installation
Verification / check
Filter: verification / check
Test / adjustment

Chap. 75
Chap. 75
Chap. 75
Chap. 75
Chap. 75

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

AIR SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

5.21

AIR SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

6 - FUEL SYSTEM
- Fuel system presentation (73-00-00)................................................... 6.2
- Fuel Control Unit (73-20-01)................................................................. 6.8
- Overspeed and drain valve (73-10-00)................................................ 6.18
- Start injector electro-valve (73-10-02)................................................. 6.20
- Start injectors (73-10-01)...................................................................... 6.22
- Main injection system (73-40-02)......................................................... 6.24
- Combustion chamber drain valve (72-40-02)..................................... 6.26
- Fuel system - Operation (73-00-00)..................................................... 6.28
- External fuel pipes (73-10-05).............................................................. 6.32
- Fuel system - 1st line maintenance..................................................... 6.34 - 6.37

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.1

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


Main components

Function
The fuel system ensures fuel supply, fuel metering, fuel
distribution and fuel injection.

- Fuel control unit


Fuel pump
Fuel filter
Metering unit

Position

- Overspeed and drain valve

All the system components are mounted on the engine except


the tachometer box (twin-engine configuration).

- Start injector electro-valve

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

- Fuel injection system.

Main characteristics
- Supply by the aircraft system and the engine pump
- Centrifugal main injection and start injection by injectors
- Manual control
- Fuel control: hydromechanical controlling and metering
device.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.2

FUEL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

SUPPLY

Centrifugal main injection


and start injection by
injectors

INJECTION
METERING

DISTRIBUTION

Manual control

TACHOMETER
BOX
(according to version)
START INJECTOR
ELECTRO-VALVE

METERING
UNIT

Fuel control:
Hydromechanical controlling
and metering device

P2

MANUAL
CONTROL
TANK

Booster pump
(according to
version)

Aircraft

OVERSPEED AND
DRAIN VALVE

FUEL
FILTER

FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM

FUEL
PUMP
N1
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT
Engine

GENERAL

FUEL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.3

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Supply:
By the aircraft system and
the engine pump

FUEL
SUPPLY

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM (1E, 1S)

Functional description

Function

The ejector is supplied with fuel from the HP pump via the astatic
valve which opens at a given pressure. The ejector ensures a
supply of fuel to the HP pump inlet.

This system is designed for aircraft without a booster pump and


assures the supply to the HP pump.

Position
All the components are fitted on a bracket on the underside of
the protection tube.

A connection between the two engines permits priming of one


engine by the other. Priming can also be carried out using a
hand pump.

Main components
- LP filter (with a by-pass valve, a pre-blockage indicator or
pre-blockage pressure switch according to version)
- Min. pressure switch
- Pressure transmitter (optional)
- Manual valve
- Ejector
- Astatic valve
- Pre-blockage indicator
- Jet.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.4

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FUEL SYSTEM PRESENTATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

ASTATIC
VALVE

PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
(pre-blockage pressure
switch in 1E version)

PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
(optional)

To HP pump
(FCU)

MIN PRESSURE
SWITCH
LP
FILTER

Priming supply
to other engine
(1S version)

HP pump
pressure
(FCU)

EJECTOR

FILTER

Fuel suction
from tank
MANUAL
VALVE

HP pump pressure
(FCU)

To HP pump
(FCU)

Fuel suction
from tank

EJECTOR

ASTATIC
VALVE

MANUAL
VALVE
MIN PRESSURE
SWITCH

BY-PASS
VALVE

To LP
filter

Fuel suction
from tank

JET

EJECTOR

LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM (1E, 1S)

FUEL SYSTEM PRESENTATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.5

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

BY-PASS
VALVE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


DESCRIPTION

Valves
- Non-return valve

Fuel pump

- Pressurising valve

Gear type pump, mechanically driven by the accessory gearbox


and fitted with a pressure relief valve.

- Overspeed and drain valve

Filter

- Purge valve.

The filter has a pre-blockage indicator (according to version)


and a by-pass valve.

Injection system

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

This part shows the main components of the fuel system.

- Start injector electro-valve

- Start injectors (x 2)

Main and auxiliary valves


The main and auxiliary valves are controlled by the control
lever which acts at the same time on the acceleration control
unit cam.

- Centrifugal injection wheel.

Metering unit
The hydromechanical controller acts on the metering needle
(see next chapter).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.6

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Pre-blockage
indicator

Pressure relief
valve

START INJECTOR
ELECTRO-VALVE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FUEL PUMP

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

START INJECTORS

FILTER
Filter by-pass
valve

PURGE VALVE

AUXILIARY VALVE
MAIN VALVE

CONTROL LEVER

Cam
METERING
UNIT

OVERSPEED AND
DRAIN VALVE

NON-RETURN
VALVE
INJECTION WHEEL

PRESSURISING
VALVE

DESCRIPTION

FUEL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.7

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


Main components

Function

- Fuel pump

The Fuel Control Unit ensures fuel supply and fuel flow
metering.

- Filter (position according to version)

Position

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

- Pre-blockage indicator (1E, 1K, 1S versions only)

- On the left front face of the accessory gearbox.

- Manual control
Valves and cam
Anticipator

Main characteristics

- Metering unit.

- Type: hydro-mechanical
- Mounting: clamp
- Replaceable components:
Filter
Pre-blockage indicator (according to version).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.8

FUEL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

CAM

Type:
Hydro-mechanical

PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
(1E, 1K, 1S
versions only)

ANTICIPATOR

Mouting:
Clamp
Replacable
component:
Filter
Pre-blocage indicator
(according to version)

FILTER
(position according
to version)

GENERAL

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.9

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

VALVE SHAFT

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL PUMP

Pressure reducing valve

Function

This is a diaphragm valve which provides a constant pressure


output of approx. 400 kPa (58 PSI) for the hydraulic supply of
the hydromechanical governor.

The pump assembly supplies fuel under determined conditions


of pressure and flow.

Main characteristics

Operation
Fuel pump

- Spur gear type


- Rotation speed: proportional to N1 speed.

The pump receives fuel from the aircraft LP system. The fuel
is drawn in by the pump, it passes between the gears and the
casing and is forced out under pressure.

Description

Pressure relief valve

- Pressure relief valve setting: 3300 kPa (478.5 PSI)

The assembly comprises the pressure pump and the pressure


relief valve.

Fuel pump

If the pump outlet pressure exceeds a given value, the pressure


relief valve will open and allow fuel to return to the pump inlet
thus limiting the maximum pressure in the system.

It is a spur gear type pump which has a drive gear and a driven
gear, the drive gear being driven by the accessory drive via
the pump drive shaft which is a quill shaft. Two lip seals, with a
drain between them prevent fuel from entering the accessory
gearbox.

Pressure reducing valve

The pump is supplied with fuel from the aircraft system.

When pump outlet pressure increases the diaphragm moves


up, reducing the valve opening and thus maintaining a constant
downstream pressure.

Pressure relief valve


It is a conical valve held closed by a spring.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

The diaphragm is subjected to fuel pressure on one side


opposed by spring pressure on the other side. The position of
the diaphragm determines the position of the valve.

Edition: April 2012

6.10

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FUEL CONTROL UNIT

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
FUEL PUMP

DRIVEN
GEAR

PUMP

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

PRESSURE
REDUCING
VALVE

Type:
Spur gear
Pressure relief valve
setting:
3300 kPa (478.5 PSI)
Rotation speed:
Proportional to
N1 speed

DRIVE
GEAR

DRAIN

SEALS

SHAFT

FUEL PUMP

PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE

FUEL PUMP

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.11

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


- 1E, 1K and 1S: The visual pre-blockage indicator.

Function
The filter retains any particles that may be in the fuel in order
to protect the metering unit components.

Position
- In the system: between the pump and the metering unit
- On the engine: lower part of FCU.

This is a differential visual indicator. It includes a red indicator


which pops out in a transparent cover when the pressure
difference across the filtering element exceeds a given
value. Two O-ring seals which ensure the sealing between
the indicator and the FCU body and between the upstream
pressure inlet and the downstream pressure inlet.

Operation
Normal operation
The fuel from the pump enters the fuel filter and flows through
the filtering element (from outside to inside).

Main characteristics
- Type: metal cartridge

The filtering element retains particles larger than 20 microns.


The fuel then flows to the metering unit.

- Filtering ability: 20 microns

Pre-blockage

- By-pass valve setting: P 200 kPa (39 PSID)

When the filter becomes dirty, the pressure difference across


the filtering element increases.

- Visual pre-blockage indicator setting: P 150 kPa


(21.75PSID).

If the pressure difference becomes higher than the visual preblockage indicator setting, the red visual indicator pops out.

Description

Note: The visual pre-blockage indicator can be reset by


removing the cover and pushing in the indicator.

The assembly comprises:

Blockage

- The filtering element: O-ring seals ensure the sealing


between the cartridge and the filter housing

When the pressure difference across the filtering element


exceeds the by-pass valve setting, the by-pass valve opens
and causes the fuel flow to by-pass the filter.

- The by-pass valve


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.12

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FUEL FILTER - VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE


INDICATOR (1E, 1K, 1S)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

CUP

FILTERING
CARTRIDGE

FILTER
BASE
FUEL
FILTER

PRE-BLOKAGE
INDICATOR

FUEL
FILTER

BY-PASS
VALVE

BY-PASS
VALVE

RED
INDICATOR

NORMAL OPERATION
FILTER
BLOCKAGE
ONSET

FILTER

VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PIN

INDICATOR OPERATION
(THE RED VISUAL
INDICATOR APPEARS)

TRANSPARENT
COVER

Type:
Metal cartridge

PRE-BLOCKAGE

Filtering ability:
20 microns

Upstream
pressure

FILTER
BLOCKAGE

OPENING OF
BY-PASS VALVE

By-pass valve setting:


P 200 kPa (39 PSID)
Visual pre-blockage
indicator setting:
P 150 kPa (21.75 PSID)

Downstream pressure
1E, 1K AND 1S:
VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE
INDICATOR

BLOCKAGE

FUEL FILTER - VISUAL PRE-BLOCKAGE INDICATOR (1E, 1K, 1S)

FUEL CONTROL UNIT

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.13

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


Operation

Function

Stop position

A mechanical control linked to the fuel control unit permits starting


control, acceleration to nominal speed and stopping.
It can also be used as a manual fuel flow control in the event
of automatic control failure.
The collective pitch lever inputs signals to the anticipator during
flight (Refer to chapter "CONTROL SYSTEM").

- position a : the two valves are closed, the cam maintains


the metering needle closed.

Start and acceleration range


- position b : progressive opening of the main valve; the cam
frees the metering needle above a certain angle.

Position

Flight position

- Interface on the left side of the FCU.

- position c : the main valve is fully open.

Description

"Manual control +" range

The manual control includes the following devices:

- position d : progressive opening of the auxiliary valve, the


main valve remaining open.

- The main valve which permits acceleration control during the


start phase and the use of the "manual control -" range
- The auxiliary valve which is used for the "manual control +"
range
- The acceleration control cam which controls the position of
the metering needle for starting.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

"Manual control -" range


In case of automatic control failure supplying too much fuel
to the engine, the control lever can be placed in the start and
acceleration range b to reduce the fuel flow.

Edition: April 2012

6.14

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MANUAL CONTROL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

CONTROL
LEVER

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

VALVE
SHAFT
CAM CONTROL
LEVER
CAM
MAIN
VALVE

AUXILIARY
VALVE
b

CONTROL
LEVER

52

62

45

ANTICIPATOR

90

Flight position

P2
ACCELERATION
CONTROL CAM
Stop position

"Manual control +" range

MANUAL CONTROL

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.15

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


Main components

Function

- Constant P valve

This constantly meters of the fuel injected into the combustion


chamber.

- Metering needle.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

METERING UNIT

Position
- In the system: downstream of the pump
- On the engine: in the FCU.

Main characteristics
- Profiled needle which moves in a calibrated orifice.
- The metering needle is controlled by the control system.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.16

FUEL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONSTANT P
VALVE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Profiled needle which moves


in a calibrated orifice
The metering needle is
controlled by the control system

METERING NEEDLE
(controlled by the
control system)

METERING UNIT

FUEL CONTROL UNIT


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.17

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OVERSPEED AND DRAIN VALVE

The overspeed and drain valve controls the fuel supply to the
injection wheel:
- Fuel supply during starting and in operation
- Fuel shut-off and draining of the injection wheel during shutdown.
The assembly also includes an electro-valve for a rapid engine
shut-down in the event of power turbine overspeed (only on
twin-engine aircraft).
The pressurising valve ensure fuel supply priority to the start
injectors during starting.

Position
- Lower left side of the combustion chamber casing.

Main characteristics
Pressurising valve setting: 180 kPa (26.1 PSI).

Main components
- Pressurising valve
- Dual valve

Operation
Engine running
As soon as the fuel pressure is sufficient to open the pressurising
valve, the pressure is admitted under the diaphragm which
causes the closing of the drain valve and the opening of the
fuel supply valve. The fuel flows to the injection wheel and is
sprayed into the combustion chamber.

During shut-down
The normal stop selection (closing of the main valve by the
control lever) results in a decrease of injection pressure. The
pressurising valve closes, the pressure decreases below the
diaphragm which causes the supply valve to close (as the
direct pump pressure increases) and the drain valve to open:
draining of fuel to prevent blockage of the injection manifold
by carbonization of the remaining fuel. The fuel return to the
tank (post TU262). When the engine is completely stopped,
the drain valve closes under the force of its spring (refer retail).

Overspeed shut-down (twin engine


configuration)
Engine shut-down can also be affected by the electro-valve
which, when opened, causes the pressure to decrease below the
diaphragm and the valve to move down (shut-down in case of
power turbine overspeed; only in twin engine configuration).

- Overspeed electro-valve.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.18

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OVERSPEED AND
DRAIN VALVE

Pressurising
valve setting:
180 kPa (26.10 PSI)

PRESSURISING
VALVE

OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE
(only on twin-engine
version)

Pump
direct
pressure

Overspeed
electro-valve

To the tank
(post TU262)
ENGINE RUNNING

DURING SHUT-DOWN

OVERSPEED AND DRAIN VALVE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

DETAIL
(after shut-down)

6.19

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Operation

The start injector electro-valve ensures the fuel distribution to


the two injectors during engine starting and their purge at the
end of start.

Purge before start

Position
Upper part of the combustion chamber casing.

Fuel injection

Main characteristics

When starting is selected, the engine pump pressure increases


rapidly and closes the purge valve, the electro-valve is energised
open and the fuel supplied by the engine pump flows to the
2injectors which spray it into the combustion chamber. The

- Reinjection prohibit switch setting: approx. 52% N1


- Purge valve setting:
opening at 5 kPa (0.725 PSI)

fuel is then ignited by the sparks of the igniter plugs.

Ventilation of the injectors

closing at 120 kPa (17.4 PSI).

Description
- Start injector electro-valve
- P2 ball valve
- Reinjection prohibit switch
- Purge valve (with cover and a support drain, according to
versions).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

During the initial phase of starting, the fuel supplied from the
aircraft system flows into the F.C.U., through the non-return
valve and to the purge valve which opens and returns the fuel
to the tank. The purpose of this phase is to expel any air which
may be in the system.

At the end of starting, the supply to the electro-valve is cut


and the valve closes. The air under compressor pressure P2
(which has increased in the meantime) lifts the ball of the valve
and flows to ventilate the injectors. This ventilation continues
as long as the engine operates to prevent blockage of the
injectors by carbonization of the remaining fuel. The P2 pressure
actuates the pressure switch to prevent any re-injection which
could cause a flame-out by suddenly reducing fuel flow to the
injection wheel.

Edition: April 2012

6.20

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

START INJECTOR ELECTRO-VALVE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

P2
BALL VALVE
START INJECTOR
ELECTRO-VALVE
AND REINJECTION
PROHIBIT SWITCH

COVER

FUEL OUTLET
TO INJECTORS

P2

FUEL
INLET

Pump
pressure
PURGE BEFORE START

FUEL INJECTION

Pump
pressure
VENTILATION
OF THE INJECTORS

START INJECTOR ELECTRO-VALVE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

PURGE
TO TANK

PUMP
PRESSURE

Reinjection prohibit
switch setting:
approx. 52% N1
Purge valve setting:
opening at 5 kPa (0.725 PSI)
closing at 120 kPa (17.4 PSI)

6.21

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PURGE VALVE
(with drain, according
to versions)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Operation

The two start injectors spray fuel into the combustion chamber
during engine starting.

Starting

Position

The fuel is atomised and is ignited by the sparks from the igniter
plugs. The flame thus produced, ignites the fuel sprayed by the
centrifugal injection wheel.

- On the upper part of the turbine casing at 2 o'clock and


10o'clock
- They penetrate into the mixer unit.

During starting the injectors are supplied with fuel.

Normal running
When the engine reaches self sustaining speed (approx.
45%N1) the fuel supply to the injectors is shut off.

Main characteristics

P2 air is then blown through the injectors to avoid carbonisation


of the residual fuel.

- Type: simple injector


- Quantity: 2

It should be noted that ventilation is continuous during engine


running.

- Ventilation: by P2 airflow.

Description
The injectors are mounted on the upper part of the turbine
casing. They penetrate into the combustion chamber through
holes in the mixer unit.
They are secured by bolts onto bosses with seals and spacers
to prevent leaks and adjust the depth of penetration into the
combustion chamber.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.22

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

START INJECTORS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Type:
Simple injector

START
INJECTOR
SUPPLY

Quantity:
2
Ventilation:
By P2 airflow

START
INJECTOR

SPACERS AND
SEALS
SHROUD

NUT

Fuel
inlet

START
INJECTOR
IGNITER
PLUG

STARTING

START
INJECTOR
VENTILATION

FILTER
MANIFOLD

P2
JET
Airflow
direction
NORMAL RUNNING

START INJECTORS
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.23

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAIN INJECTION SYSTEM


Centrifugal injection assembly

The injection system sprays fuel into the combustion chamber


to give stable and efficient combustion.

Position
- On the engine: inside the combustion chamber. The injection
wheel is mounted between the centrifugal compressor and
the turbine shaft. The distributor is bolted to the diffuser
backplate.

is achieved by pressurised labyrinth seals.

Operation
The fuel is delivered to the distributor by the internal supply
pipe.

Main characteristics

It passes through the distributor's axial holes into the chamber


in the injection wheel.

- Type: centrifugal injection


- Radial fuel supply.

As the centrifugal injection wheel is rotating at high speed (N1)


the fuel is centrifuged out through the radial holes and is sprayed
between the two swirl plates.

Description
Combustion chamber fuel inlet union
Fitted at the lower right front face of the compressor casing, it
has a plug to test the sealing of the union.

Internal supply pipe


This pipe connects the inlet union to the fuel distributor. It is
fitted between the front swirl plate and the diffuser back-plate.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

This assembly consists of a stationary distributor and a wheel.


The distributor, fitted onto the diffuser back-plate, is drilled with
axial holes which deliver the fuel to the wheel. The injection
wheel, mounted by curvic-couplings between the compressor
and the turbine shaft, is drilled with radial holes which form the
fuel spraying jets. Sealing between the distributor and the wheel

It should be noted that the injection pressure is supplied by the


centrifugal force and therefore the fuel system does not require
very high pressures.
The centrifugal injection wheel fuel chamber is sealed by
pressurised labyrinth seals. There is a small air flow into the fuel
chamber. During shut-down the fuel remaining in the system is
purged via the overspeed and drain valve.

Edition: April 2012

6.24

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

COMBUSTION
CHAMBER FUEL
INLET UNION

Type:
Centrifugal injection

FUEL SPRAYING
INTO THE
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER

CENTRIFUGAL
INJECTION
WHEEL

Radial fuel supply

DISTRIBUTOR

INTERNAL
SUPPLY PIPE

DISTRIBUTOR

CENTRIFUGAL
INJECTION WHEEL
(with spraying jets)

COMBUSTION
CHAMBER FUEL
INLET UNION
Fuel inlet

COMBUSTION
CHAMBER FUEL
INLET UNION
SUPPLY PIPE

LEAK CHECK
PLUG

MAIN INJECTION SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.25

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Operation

The valve drains overboard any unburnt fuel remaining in the


combustion chamber.

The valve has two positions: open and closed.

Position
- On the engine: screwed into the turbine casing lower part.

Open position
When the engine is not running and at the beginning of start,
the valve is held open by the action of the tension spring.

- Type: half-ball valve

Any unburnt fuel in the combustion chamber will drain through


the valve overboard to the drain system. This ensures that no
fuel accumulates in the combustion chamber which could cause
starting problems (e.g. overtemperature).

- Setting: closing obtained at about 40% N1.

Closed position

Description

As the engine starts the combustion chamber pressure increases.


This pressure is felt on the upper surface of the half ball which
moves down to close the drain.

Main characteristics

The drain valve includes the following components:


- A threaded part to fix the valve on the combustion chamber

The valve closes during the initial phase of starting for a speed
of about 40% N1.

- A half-ball valve mounted on a tension spring


- An outlet union which connects to the drain system
- A circlip which retains the valve in the body.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.26

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Setting:
Closing obtained at
about approx. 40% N1

Unburnt fuel

P2 air pressure

CIRCLIP
SPRING

THREADED
PART

COMBUSTION
CHAMBER DRAIN
VALVE

HALF-BALL
VALVE

OUTLET
UNION

To drain system
"OPEN" position

COMBUSTION CHAMBER DRAIN VALVE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

"CLOSED" position

6.27

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Type:
Half-ball valve

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION


This part deals with the following operating phases: pre-start,
starting, normal operation, manual control and shut-down.

Pre-start
- The pump is not operating and there is no pressure in the
system

Starting
When engine start is selected, the start accessories are
electrically supplied.
The pump is driven and supplies the start injectors, due to the
priority given by the pressurising valve, then by the centrifugal
injection wheel.
The constant P valve operates and returns the excess fuel
to the pump inlet.

- The main and auxiliary valves are closed


- The constant P valve is closed
- The metering needle is closed by the acceleration control
cam
- The following valves are closed:
non return valve
pressurising valve
overspeed and drain valve
purge valve

The fuel flow is controlled by the movement of the control


lever.
At 45% N1, the start accessories are de-energised by releasing
the start button and the start injectors are ventilated by P2 air
pressure.
At 52% N1, P2 pressure opens the reinjection prohibit switch to
avoid an accidental fuel reinjection switch could cause engine
flame-out.

- The start injector electro-valve is closed.

The control lever is moved to the flight position, progressively


opening the main valve to accelerate the engine until the
hydromechanical control takes over.

Purge of the system


During the initial phase of starting, the fuel supplied from the
aircraft system flows into the FCU, through the no-return valve
and to the purge valve which opens and returns the fuel to the
tank. The purpose of this phase is to expel any air which may
be in the system.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.28

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PRE-START - PURGE OF THE SYSTEM - STARTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

P2

P2

STARTING
45% < N1 < 52%

P2

PURGE OF THE SYSTEM

STARTING N1 < 45%

STARTING
N1 > 52%

PRE-START - PURGE OF THE SYSTEM - STARTING

FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.29

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

NORMAL RUNNING - MANUAL CONTROL - SHUTDOWN

Normal running
The required fuel flow is metered by the metering needle. The
metering needle position is determined by the hydromechanical
control system.
The fuel pump always supplies more fuel than the engine
requires. The excess fuel returns to the pump inlet through the
constant P valve.
The start injectors are continuously ventilated by P2 air
circulation.

Manual control
The manual control is used for starting and stopping the engine.
It can also be used in case of a control system failure.

Shut-down
The lever is pulled fully rearward, closing the main valve which
cuts the fuel flow to the engine causing it to run down and
stop.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.30

FUEL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

P2

P2
-

P2

Flight
position

NORMAL RUNNING

P2

MANUAL CONTROL

SHUT-DOWN
When the enegine is completely stopped,
the dual valve closes the drain under
action of the spring

NORMAL RUNNING - MANUAL CONTROL - SHUT-DOWN

FUEL SYSTEM - OPERATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.31

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

EXTERNAL FUEL PIPES


Note: The pipes may be different according to version.

The fuel pipes ensure the circulation of fuel between the


components of the system.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Description

Main characteristics
- Type of pipes: rigid, stainless steel
- Type of unions: with integral olives.

Main pipes
- Fuel inlet union
- From FCU to overspeed and drain valve and to injector
electro-valve
- From electro-valve to the two injectors
- From overspeed and drain valve to fuel inlet union
- From union to the wheel (internal pipe)
- From the pump to the overspeed and drain valve and the
purge valve (control system)
- Drains.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.32

FUEL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FROM START
PURGE VALVE
TO OVERSPEED
DRAIN VALVE

LEFT
INJECTION
SUPPLY

FROM PRESSURE
PUMP TO
OVERSPEED
AND DRAIN VALVE

FROM START
ELECTRO-VALVE
TO CHECK VALVE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

P2
P2

RIGHT
INJECTION
SUPPLY

FROM FCU TO
PRESSURISING
VALVE

INJECTION

FROM START
PURGE VALVE
TO TANK

FROM OVERSPEED
AND DRAIN VALVE
TO DRAIN
(post TU262)

FROM OVERSPEED
AND DRAIN VALVE
TO DRAIN
(pre TU262)

EXTERNAL FUEL PIPES


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.33

FUEL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

Recommended maintenance tasks

- After the last flight of the day

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- Before the first flight of the day


- Pre-flight
- Post-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.34

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

SERVICING INSPECTIONS

MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS

AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS


- Inspection of the FCU mechanical controls

- FCU filtering element


Replacement

Chap. 73

- Injection wheel
Permeability check

Chap. 72

- Combustion chamber drain valve


Inspection and check

Chap. 72

- Fuel LRUs
Inspection and check

Chap. 73

Ground run
- Start purge valve (auxiliary valve)
Leak test
- Injection union (if module removed)
Leak test
- Re-injection prohibit switch of the ignition
solenoid valve
Inspection and check
- Overspeed and drain valve
Operational check
- Deceleration control unit
Leak test

Chap. 73
Chap. 72
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.35

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.36

FUEL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
- Ignition solenoid valve
Removal / installation
- Pressurising valve
Removal / installation
Inspection / check
- Starting drain valve assy
Removal / installation
Inspection / check
- Starting drain valve assy - auxiliary valve
Sealing washer: removal / installation
- Drain valve of the injection manifold
Removal / installation
Inspection / check
- Overspeed electrovalve
Removal / installation
- FCU fuel filter
Removal / installation
- Pre-blocage indicator
Removal / installation
- Low-fuel pressure switch
Removal / installation

Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73

- 1S-1E: Main fuel filter


Removal / installation
Pre-blocage indicator
Removal / installation
- 1S-1E: Astatic valve
Removal / installation
- 1S-1E: Ejector
Removal / installation

Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73

Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

FUEL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

6.37

FUEL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

(non exhaustive list)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

7 - CONTROL SYSTEM
- Control system presentation............................................................... 7.2
- Control system - Operation.................................................................. 7.6
- Control system - 1st line maintenance............................................... 7.30 - 7.33

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.1

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


Main components

Functions

- Fuel control unit

The system is designed to adapt the engine to the aircraft power


requirements whilst remaining within defined limits.

- Engine and systems

The main functions are:


- Manual control

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

- Aircraft: various systems (control, indication, supply)


- Tachometer box (according to version).

- Speed control
- Various limits
- Acceleration control
- Overspeed protection.

Main characteristics
- Hydromechanical control
- Manual control.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.2

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Hydromechanical
control
Manual control

AIRCRAFT
(various systems)

TEST

MAIN FUNCTIONS
- Manual control

FUEL CONTROL
UNIT

TACHOMETER BOX
(according to version)

- Speed control
- Various limits
- Acceleration control
- Overspeed protection
ENGINE
(engine and systems)

GENERAL

CONTROL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.3

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


The complete system includes aircraft components, engine
components and the FCU.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

DESCRIPTION

Aircraft components
- Control devices (control lever and anticipator)
- Indicating devices (indicators, lights...)

Engine components
- Hydromechanical components:
Overspeed and drain valve
Purge valve
Start injector electro-valve
Pressurising valve
Start injectors
Main injection system
- FCU components:
Power turbine speed governor
Gas generator speed governor
Acceleration control unit
Metering unit
Deceleration control unit.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.4

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

START INJECTOR
ELECTRO-VALVE

START
INJECTORS

POWER TURBINE
SPEED GOVERNOR

PURGE
VALVE
CONTROL
LEVER

GAS GENERATOR
SPEED GOVERNOR

OVERSPEED AND
DRAIN VALVE

ACCELERATION
CONTROL UNIT

METERING
UNIT

DECELERATION
CONTROL UNIT

PRESSURIZING
VALVE

INJECTION
WHEEL

DESCRIPTION

CONTROL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.5

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ANTICIPATOR

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


Adaptation to requirements

Installation configuration
The gas generator supplies power to the power turbine which
is connected to the helicopter main rotor.

Installation requirements
- Aircraft rotor speed (NR) almost constant in all operating
conditions (because of the rotor efficiency) whatever the load
applied
- Max. torque limitation (imposed by the mechanical transmission
and the helicopter main gearbox)
- Power turbine rotation speed (N2) within given limits (in fact
almost constant, as it is connected to the rotor)

The control system ensures the engine adaptation to the


requirements by metering the fuel flow WF sprayed into the
combustion chamber.
Thus, the gas generator adapts automatically to the requirements
(N1 demand) to maintain constant power turbine rotation speed
N2 whilst keeping all the other parameters within determined
limits.
This adaptation is illustrated by:
- The diagram W/N2 which illustrates the power W, the max.
torque TRQ and the rotation speeds N1 and N2
- The diagram N1/N2 which illustrates the N1/N2
relationship.

- Limitation of the gas generator rotation speed N1:


Max. N1 (maximum engine power)
Min. N1 (to avoid critical speeds)
- Load sharing (equal sharing of loads between the 2
engines)
- Protection against surge, flame-out, overtemperature

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.6

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONTROL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

NR
N2

Ma

TRQ

qu

or

t
x.

Max. N1

R
eT

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

N1

N1 isospeeds

TET
Min. N1

WF
Control
system

N2

POWER W / N1, N2

N1

REQUIREMENTS

Max.

- NR
- N2
- Max. torque TRQ
- N1
- W eng 1 = W eng 2
- Protections

Nominal N2
Operating
range

Min.

INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION
AND REQUIREMENTS

N1 / N2
N2
ADAPTATION TO REQUIREMENTS

CONTROL

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.7

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


Compensation

Static droop
Each governor (N2 and N1) uses the principle of the centrifugal
governor (a system invented by James Watt), in which a control
spring is set in opposition to a flyweight. The spring attempts
to open the metering valve and is opposed by the centrifugal
force generated by the flyweight.
At a stabilised rating, the system is in equilibrium: the force
exerted by the spring is equal to the centrifugal force (Fs=Fc).
There is therefore a given fuel flow and a nominal rating.
In a transient rating, e.g. when the engine rpm decreases (due
to the increase in the resisting torque), the centrifugal force
decreases. The force exerted by the spring therefore becomes
the greater of the two and opens the metering valve. This
increases the engine rpm until the equilibrium is re-established
(Fs=Fc). Although the equilibrium has been re-established, the
spring is now less compressed than at the previous engine rpm.
It therefore exerts less force, which leads to a slight reduction
in the nominal engine rpm.
In this type of control system, the N1 speed is made to be
inversely proportional to the N2. The relationship between N1
and N2 illustrates this proportionality and the variation in N2 is
referred to as "static droop".

As the largest load variations are caused by changes in


collective pitch, a link between the collective pitch lever and the
governor allows the system to compensate for the static droop.
In addition, the detection phase is brought forward (hence the
name "anticipator") to reduce the response time. To do this, a
cam is added to compress the spring so that it exerts the same
force in all collective pitch positions.
The diagram shows the apparent static-droop line for different
collective pitch positions (anticipator effect):
In the diagram: 1 = fine pitch, 2 = medium pitch,
3=coarsepitch.
In operation, points 1, 2 and 3 are obtained and the static droop
is therefore compensated for, i.e. the power turbine speed and
therefore the rotor speed are almost constant in all operating
conditions.
In transient ratings, the power turbine speed varies, but the
governor acts to bring it very quickly back to its nominal value,
to within the value of the static droop.
Note: The static droop is slightly overcompensated.

Although the "static droop" ensures the stability of the system,


it is not acceptable because the helicopter rotor requires one
constant rotation speed.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.8

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

STATIC DROOP - COMPENSATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

L1

L2

WF/N1

L1

L1

WF/N1
3
2
3

2
1

Static droop

N2

N2

STATIC DROOP - COMPENSATION

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.9

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


The system meters the fuel flow in order to match the engine
power to the requirements thus keeping power turbine rotation
speed constant. The control components are contained in the
hydromechanical unit mounted on the front face of the accessory
gearbox.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PRINCIPLE OF THE CONTROL LOOP

Operation of the control loop


The power turbine governor compares the actual speed N2
with a speed datum which varies with the collective pitch. It
determines a speed datum (N1*) which is a function of the
difference measured.
The gas generator governor compares the datum speed (N1*)
and the actual speed (N1) and meters the fuel to maintain
the datum speed, thus matching the gas generator to the
conditions.
The acceleration control unit limits the transient fuel flow (WF)
variations in relation to P2 pressure so as to prevent compressor
surge while permitting quick response times.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.10

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

POWER
TURBINE

GAS
GENERATOR

LOAD TRQ
(e.g. collective pitch)

N2
t

MAIN GEARBOX

N2 SPEED (Transient variation


and quick return to nominal speed)

P2
WF

ACCELERATION
CONTROL UNIT

COLLECTIVE
PITCH CONTROL

FUEL FLOW WF (Variation


controlled by the governor)

N1

GAS GENERATOR
SPEED GOVERNOR

WF

N1
N1*

+
N2

POWER TURBINE
SPEED GOVERNOR
+

t
N1 SPEED (Increase or decrease
to match the load variations)

N2*

VARIATION OF THE MAIN


PARAMETERS IN TIME

PRINCIPLE OF THE CONTROL LOOP

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.11

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TRQ

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER TURBINE GOVERNOR

GAS GENERATOR GOVERNOR

This proportional type governor determines a datum signal


according to the anticipator signal and the actual speed.

This integral type governor controls the datum speed demanded


by the power turbine governor. It achieves this control by
metering the fuel flow.

In stabilized conditions, the flyweight centrifugal force balances


the datum spring force. The lever is in a fixed position in front
of the potentiometric jet. The reduced pressure flows to the
low pressure and a modulated pressure is established in the
chamber. The amplifier piston (subjected to a reference pressure
on one side and to the modulated pressure on the other side)
determines the N1 datum transmitted to the gas generator
governor by a lever and a plunger.
Transient conditions, the anticipator modifies the spring
force while the centrifugal force changes. The lever pivots and
moves in front of the potentiometric jet thus altering the leak
and therefore changing the modulated pressure. The amplifier
piston then moves and, by means of the lever and plunger, sets
a new datum on the gas generator governor. The gas generator
adapts itself to the new condition until the balance is regained.

In stabilized conditions, the flyweight centrifugal force balances


the force of the datum spring. The lever is in a fixed position and
the valve determines a given modulated pressure. The working
piston controls a given position of the metering needle which
meters the fuel flow to obtain the required rotation speed. The
system is "in balance".
In transient conditions, we have seen that the power turbine
governor determines a new datum which upsets the balance. The
lever moves, the leak varies and consequently the modulated
pressure. The working piston moves the metering needle until the
new N1 datum is obtained. The gas generator speed increases
or decreases, thus regulating engine output power to match the
load and obtain a constant power turbine speed.

Thermal compensator
The thermal compensator moves the potentiometric jet as a
function of the fuel temperature, which slightly modifies the
modulated pressure, thus maintaining the max. N1 speed
constant.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.12

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
N2 DATUM
SPRING

Modulated pressure
N2 (approx. 280 kPa)
Modulated pressure
N1 (approx. 300 kPa)

AMPLIFIER
PISTON

LEVER

POTENTIOMETRIC
JET

Reduced pressure
(approx. 400 kPa)

N1 SPEED
DETECTOR
(flyweight)

MAX N1
STOP

LEVER

MIN N1
STOP

DAMPING
DEVICE

N1 DATUM
PLUNGER
N1 DATUM
SPRING
THERMAL
COMPENSATOR

POTENTIOMETRIC
JET

WORKING
PISTON

METERING
NEEDLE

POWER TURBINE GOVERNOR AND GAS GENERATOR GOVERNOR

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.13

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ANTICIPATOR

Low pressure
(approx. 100 kPa)

N2 SPEED DETECTOR
(flyweight)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ACCELERATION CONTROL UNIT

DECELERATION CONTROL UNIT

It limits fuel flow increase in transient conditions, in order to


prevent compressor surge during acceleration.

In some versions, a deceleration control unit (or min flow limiter)


is included in the metering unit to prevent flame-out during
deceleration.

In stabilized conditions, there is a gap between the fork


and the metering valve. The position of the metering valve is
determined by the working piston.
In load increase transient conditions, the governor "responds"
and the working piston moves rapidly. Under the action of its
spring, the metering needle opens until it stops against the
fork. This displacement represents what is called "instant flow
increase" initiating the acceleration. Then the subsequent
increase in P2 pressure causes the deformation of the capsule
which permits further opening of the metering needle until it
comes into contact with the working piston.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

In load decrease transient conditions, the closing of the metering


needle is limited by a mechanical stop.
This mechanical stop is controlled by a diaphragm subjected
to P2 pressure.
The stop withdraws as the P2 pressure decreases in order to
prevent engine flame-out during rapid deceleration.

Edition: April 2012

7.14

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
Max. flow for a determined P2
pressure (lever mechanism position)

Max.
X

WF
Max. flow stop of the
acceleration control unit

Min. flow curve


as a function of P2 pressure

"X" instant flow increase =


distance between the metering
valve position and fork position
Min. flow stop of the
acceleration control unit

Min.

P2
ACCELERATION CURVE
(Fuel flow WF as a function of compressor pressure P2)
WORKING
PISTON

GAP (x)

CAM

FUEL METERING
NEEDLE

WORKING
PISTON

DECELERATION
CONTROL UNIT

CAM

x
P0

ACCELERATION
CAPSULE

ACCELERATION
CAPSULE

LEVER
MECHANISM
DIAGRAM OF THE MECHANISM

P2

DECELERATION CURVE
(WF as a function of P2)

P0

P2

BAROSTATIC
DEVICE

P2

METERING
NEEDLE
LEVER
MECHANISM

ACCELERATION CONTROL UNIT AND DECELERATION CONTROL UNIT

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.15

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

WF

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


Operation

Metering needle
The metering needle is a profiled needle which moves in a
calibrated orifice.

Graph of fuel flow (WF) as a function of metering needle


position (S): each position corresponds to a fuel flow and each
displacement S corresponds to a proportional flow variation
WF.

The fuel under pump pressure flows through the passage


determined by the metering needle sliding in the orifice.

Constant P valve
To obtain a fuel flow solely depending upon the metering needle
position, this valve keeps a constant pressure difference across
the metering needle. It consists of a diaphragm subjected
metering needle pressure variation. Any variation of pressure
difference (P) is sensed by this valve which returns more
or less fuel to the inlet of the pump. In fact, the pump always
supplies a flow higher than the engine requirements and the
excess fuel is returned to the inlet.
The P transient variations are due to the pump pressure
variations, to the downstream pressure variations and of course
to the displacement of the metering valve.
For example: when the metering needle opens, the pressure
difference decreases, the valve diaphragm senses this and
moves to close the return. More fuel is admitted to the engine,
the upstream pressure increases and the nominal P is
regained.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.16

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

METERING UNIT

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

CONSTANT
P VALVE

FUEL
RETURN

WF

P2
P0

WF

S
WF AS A FUNCTION OF
NEEDLE POSITIONS (S)

METERING
NEEDLE

FUEL
OUTLET
(WF)

METERING UNIT

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.17

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FUEL
INLET

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


Min. governed speed

Limits of gas generator speeds


The gas generator rotation speed varies (to adapt the engine to
changing conditions) between two extreme limits represented
by adjustable mechanical stops.

Max. speed
It is automatically limited by a fixed adjustable stop which
represents the max operating rating.
MTOP- Max. Take-Off Power in the case of a single engine (in
fact, this rating is given at a value slightly lower than
the mechanical stop and the engine must be operated
not to overcome it).
MCP - Max. Contingency Power in the case of engine failure
during take-off or landing of a twin engine helicopter
(OEI 2 min. 30 sec.)
The effect of fuel temperature on the speed (variation of fuel
viscosity changing the balance point of the hydromechanical
governor) is compensated by the capsule in order to obtain speed
invariability (especially max. N1). A slight max. N1 variation is
however introduced but within given limits.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

It is limited by a fixed adjustable mechanical stop to avoid low


speeds corresponding to critical ratings. In operation, this limit
is practically never reached because, even at zero torque,
the power to drive the compressor requires a higher speed.
Therefore, the stop is only a safety measure and it is only
adjusted on the FCU test rig.

Limits of fuel flow


Fuel flow variation in transient conditions is limited by the
acceleration control unit to obtain an optimum acceleration
without compressor surge. The acceleration rate determines
the response time. The slope of acceleration is only adjustable
on the test rig.
The min. fuel flow (limit to prevent flame-out) is limited by a
mechanical stop on the metering needle. In some versions,
this stop is variable with P2 pressure; it is also called the
deceleration control unit.
The max. fuel flow is determined by the full opening of the
metering needle for a given pressure difference P. It is a factory
adjustment which represents a sort of power limitation.
In manual control (emergency control), the max. fuel flow is
limited at a lower value to avoid exceeding of the limits.

Edition: April 2012

7.18

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

LIMITS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

N1
N1 max. as a function of
fuel temperature

N1 limit to
ensure power
WF
Metering unit max. WF
Manual control max. WF
(emergency)

Temperature
N1 LIMITS

Metering unit min. WF


(with deceleration
control unit)
Metering unit min. WF
(without deceleration
control unit)
P2
FUEL FLOW LIMITS (WF)

LIMITS

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.19

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

N1 thermal
limit

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

LIMIT OF TORQUE AND POWER TURBINE


OVERSPEED SAFETY SYSTEM

Limit of torque
A max. torque limit is required by the mechanical transmission.
The control system does not ensure a torque limit and the
operating instructions should be observed to prevent any
overtorque. The flight manual indicates the torque limits: also
see chapter "indication" of this manual for details of the torque
measuring system.

Power turbine overspeed safety system


This safety system is not included in the control unit but is often
mentioned among the functions of the engine control system.
The overspeed safety system is designed mainly to take into
account the case of shaft failure resulting in a very sudden
acceleration which cannot be contained by the speed governor.
The system includes a speed detector, an electronic unit and
the overspeed and drain valve of the fuel system.
It is installed on some versions: twin engine configurations mainly.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.20

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

OVERSPEED AND
DRAIN VALVE

WF

TACHOMETER
BOX

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

N2
DETECTOR

TRQ
TEST

TORQUE
INDICATOR

LIMIT OF TORQUE - POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED SAFETY SYSTEM

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.21

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


As regards the operation, the control system performance
determines some flight characteristics.
The following can be distinguished:
- The response time

It is the transient speed variation occurring during a load variation.


The amplitude of this variation can be observed on the rotor
speed indicator; it is related to the other characteristics.

Static variation of power turbine speed

- The static and dynamic power turbine speed variations

It can be defined as the speed variation at different ratings. This


static variation (a static droop which is slightly overcompensated)
can be checked by noting NR speed at different operating points
(eg: ground fine pitch and cruise pitch). With the increase of
power, the NR increases slightly within given limits.

- The max. speed of the gas generator.

Response time
It can be defined as the time required to regain power turbine
nominal speed in transient conditions. The response time
is closely associated to the rate of acceleration of the gas
generator.
A check of the response time can be made by recording
parameters during a load application. It is less than 4 seconds
between N1 min. and max. in standard conditions.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Dynamic variation of power turbine speed

Max. available speed of the gas generator


It is the max. speed that can be obtained from the gas generator
(take-off on single engine and max. contingency on twin engine).
This rating can be checked on a load application, noting the max
speed obtained when the rotor speed starts decreasing.

Edition: April 2012

7.22

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

N2

N1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Max.

100%
< 4 sec.
90

time

80

70

< 4 sec.

Min.

100%

RESPONSE TIME AND DYNAMIC


VARIATION OF THE POWER
TURBINE SPEED N2

N2

STATIC VARIATION OF N2
POWER TURBINE SPEED

CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.23

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

Principle of load sharing

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION

In normal conditions, the helicopter rotor is driven by the two


power turbines and therefore:
NR = k.N2 eng 1 = k.N2 eng 2
The speed signals received by the two power turbine governors
being identical (as well as the signals from the collective
pitch), they determine identical datum signals sent to the two
gas generator governors which meter fuel flow to keep them
constant.
As the power is closely related to the N1 speed and as the
efficiency does not vary much from one power turbine to another,
a fairly good load sharing is obtained.

Operation on one engine


In this case, the engine remaining in operation supplies the
power while the other one is disconnected by the free wheel.
The limit of the operative engine is represented by the max.
contingency rating automatically limited by the fuel control unit.
This rating, determined for engine failure during take-off or
landing, has a limited duration: 2 min. 30 sec.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.24

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MAIN
GEARBOX

NR = k.N2 eng1 = k.N2 eng2

COLLECTIVE
PITCH

FREE WHEEL
REDUCTION
GEARBOX

NR
N2
(1 and 2)

TRQ

TRQ1
and
TRQ2

POWER
TURBINE
GAS
GENERATOR

N2

T4

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

T4

N1 Max.

POWER TURBINE
GOVERNOR

WF

N1

N1
TRIM

N2*

N1*
GAS GENERATOR GOVERNOR

TWIN-ENGINE CONFIGURATION

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.25

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


Evolution of parameters

"Image" of a load increase


- Collective pitch

Sudden increase from min. to max. almost instantly

t = 0

- "Start" Collective pitch movement

- The pitch increases

W1 > W

- The resisting torque becomes higher than the


drive torque

N2

- The power turbine rotation speed decreases

- The N2 governor detects the 2 signals, and


sends a datum increase to the N1 governor:
the N1 governor increases the fuel flow WF

WF

- Instantaneous flow step

P2

- Th e c o m p r e s s o r d i s ch a r g e p r e s su re
increases

AC

- The acceleration control unit enables the


acceleration to continue

N2 - Power turbine speed



Transient decrease and rapid return to nominal speed
after a slight overshoot, and a slight overcompensation
of the static droop
N1 - Gas generator speed

Speed increase and stabilisation after a slight
overshoot
t

- Time in seconds

Combustion - The flow WF increases in the combustion


chamber
N1

- increases, the output power W increases, the N2 speed


stops decreasing and returns to its nominal value when
the equilibrium between torques W1 = W is achieved.

t < 4 sec. - End of transient

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.26

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD INCREASE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

NR

t=0
t

t<4

W=W

N2

1
W >W

N2
1

N2

N2
W

WF

N1

P2

N1

t
2
3

t
1

AC

Combustion

WF
1
"Image" of a load increase

N1

N2

Evolution of parameters during a load increase

CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD INCREASE

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.27

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION


Evolution of parameters

"Image" of a load decrease


- Collective pitch

Rapid decrease of pitch

t = 0

- "Start" Collective pitch movement

- The pitch decreases

W1 < W

- The resisting torque becomes lower than the


drive torque

N2

- The power turbine rotation speed increases

N1 - Gas generator speed



Speed decrease and stabilisation

- The governor detects the N2 increase and


decreases the fuel flow WF

WF

- Instantaneous deceleration flow

P2

DC

- The deceleration controller limits the min. fuel


flow (if needs be)

N2 - Power turbine speed



Transient increase and return to nominal speed (within
the static droop)

- Time in seconds

The compressor discharge pressure decreases

Combustion - The flow WF decreases in the combustion


chamber
N1

- decreases, the output power W decreases, the N2 speed


returns to its nominal value.

t < 4 sec. - End of transient

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.28

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD DECREASE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

t=0
t<4

t
N2

1
W <W

N2
1
W =W

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

NR

N2
t

N2

N1

WF

N1

P2

1
3
2
1

DC

t
3

1
2

Combustion
WF

N1

N2

2
"Image" of a load decrease

Evolution of parameters during a load decrease

CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP - LOAD DECREASE

CONTROL SYSTEM - OPERATION

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.29

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)

Recommended maintenance tasks

List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- After the last flight of the day


- Before the first flight of the day
- Pre-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

- Post-flight

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.30

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS

Ground run or in flight


- Do a check of engine health

FM

Test flight
- F.C.U. characteristics
Check

Chap. 73

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CONTROL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.31

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

CONTROL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).
Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to
refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.32

CONTROL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- FCU
Removal / installation No. 1
Removal / installation No. 2
Inspection / check
- Temperature compensating device
Removal / installation
- Anticipator and low fuel control
Removal / installation

Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73
Chap. 73

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

CONTROL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

7.33

CONTROL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

8 - MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

- Measurement and indicating systems presentation......................... 8.2


- Speed measurement and indicating system (77-10-03).................... 8.4

- T4 measurement and indicating system............................................. 8.10


- Torque measurement and indicating system..................................... 8.14
- Miscellaneous indications................................................................... 8.18
- Measurement and indicating systems - 1st line maintenance......... 8.22 - 8.25

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.1

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Functions

Miscellaneous indications
- N1 speed (gas generator)

The indicating system provides the following functions:

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS


PRESENTATION

- N2 speed (power turbine)

- It allows the pilot to check that the engine is operating within


determined limits

- T4 gas temperature

- It indicates faults or abnormal changes of parameters

- Engine torque

- It allows the checking of certain operating phases.

- Oil system indication,


- Miscellaneous (indicating lights and monitoring).

Note: In fact there are operating parameters (e.g. N1 and


torque) and monitoring parameters (e.g. N2, T4, oil
temperature and pressure).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.2

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

- To check that the engine operates


within determined limits
- To indicate fault or abnormal
changes of parameters
- To check certain operating phases

N1 SPEED
INDICATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FUNCTIONS

T4 GAS TEMPERATURE
INDICATION

MISCELLANEOUS
(indicating lights
and monitoring)

OIL SYSTEM
INDICATION

N2 SPEED
INDICATION

ENGINE TORQUE
INDICATION

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.3

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

GENERAL

Operation

Function

N1 is an operating parameter as it reflects the engine power


and serves to determine the limit ratings.

This system measures the rotation speeds of the gas generator


(N1) and the power turbine (N2).

The N2 signal is used for the N2 indication (associated with


the NR indication).

Main characteristics
- Type:
tachometer transmitter
phonic wheel (according to version)
- Transmitter signals: frequency proportional to the rotation
speed.

Main components
- N1 speed transmitter
- N2 speed transmitter
- Electrical harnesses for connection to the indicators.

Description
One or two tachometer generators (N2 optional) linked to one
or two indicators.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.4

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

N1 SPEED
SENSOR

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

PHONIC WHEEL
(starter generator
drive shaft)
N1 SPEED SENSOR

N2 SPEED
SENSOR

REAR OF THE
INTERMEDIATE GEAR
OF THE REDUCTION
GEARBOX

N2
INDICATOR
ACCESSORY GEARBOX
REAR FACE

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
N2 SPEED SENSOR

GENERAL

SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.5

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

N1
INDICATOR

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Description

N1 AND N2 TACHOMETER-TRANSMITTERS
(EXCEPT 1E, 1S)

The assembly consists of:

Function
The system measures the gas generator rotation speed (N1)
and the power turbine rotation speed (N2).

Position

- A tachometer-generator whose rotor is a mechanically driven


permanent magnet. It delivers a 3-phase AC voltage electrical
signal whose frequency is proportional to the speed
- An asynchronous motor which receives the signal from the
transmitter and displays the speed on a graduated dial.

General operation

- On the rear face of the accessory gearbox:


N1 on the right-hand side
N2 on the left-hand side (according to version).

The N1 signal is a control parameter because it reflects the


power being supplied and determines the operating "limit ratings".
The N2 signal is an indicating parameter (associated with the
rotor rotation speed indication (NR)).

Main characteristics

N1/N2 operation

- Type:
Tachometer-transmitter
3-phase permanent magnet generator

The rotation of the permanent magnet in front of the three


windings induces an AC voltage.

- Transmitter signals: frequency proportional to the rotation


speed

The frequency of this AC voltage is proportional to the rotation


speed.

- Quantity: 2 identical N1/N2 transmitters (interchangeable).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.6

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

BODY

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Type:
- Tachometer-transmitter
- 3-phase permanent magnet
generator
Transmitter signals:
Frequency proportional
to the rotation speed
Quantity:
2 identical N1/N2 transmitters
(interchangeable)

ELECTRICAL
PLUG

STATOR

INDICATOR

N1 AND N2 TACHOMETER TRANSMITTERS (EXCEPT 1E, 1S)

SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.7

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEM

Description
The system consists of a toothed wheel, called a phonic wheel,
rotating in front of an electro-magnetic pick-up which is connected
to an indicator.

Function
The system measures the gas generator rotation speed (N1)
and the power turbine rotation speed (N2).

Position
- N1 sensor: on the accessory gearbox casing right-hand side
- N2 sensor: at the bottom of the rear drive shaft casing.

Operation
The passage of the teeth in front of the electro-magnetic
sensor induces an alternating current in the sensor windings.
This current has a frequency proportional to the speed and the
number of teeth:

nd x N
F=
60

Main characteristics
- Type: electro-magnetic

(nd = Number of teeth; N = rotation speed in RPM;


F=frequency)

- Quantity: 2 (interchangeable)

The signal from the sensor is transmitted to the cockpit indicator


which transforms it into an indication which may be analog,
digital or both.

- N1 phonic wheel:
Quantity: 1
On the starter-generator drive shaft
- N2 phonic wheel:
Quantity: 1
On the rear of the intermediate gear of the reduction
gearbox.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.8

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

N1 AND N2 SPEED SENSORS (1E, 1S)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TO THE INDICATOR

PHONIC WHEEL
SPEED
SENSOR

N1 SPEED
SENSOR

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

REAR CASING OF
THE INTERMEDIATE
GEAR

F=

nd x N
60

PHONIC WHEEL
(starter generator
drive shaft)

N2 SPEED
SENSOR
INDICATOR

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
SENSOR

PHONIC
WHEEL

N1 AND N2 SPEED SENSORS (1E, 1S)

SPEED MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.9

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

GENERAL

Operation

Function

The gas temperature (T4) is an operating parameter, particularly


during engine starting.

This system provides an indication of the gas temperature (T4)


at the gas generator turbine outlet.

As it would be difficult to measure the turbine inlet temperature,


the gas generator outlet temperature is measured.

Position

All versions (except 1E-1S): The system includes thermocouple


probes which are connected to an indicator by means of a
harness.

- All the system components are located on the engine except


the T4 indicator.

Main characteristics
- Type: thermocouple probes
- Indication: degrees Celsius.

1E-1S: The thermocouple junction box provides a connection


between the thermocouple probes and the indicator.
The system produces a voltage proportional to the temperature
of a junction of two dissimilar metals.
The voltage produced is measured by a galvanometer indicator
which is graduated in degrees Celsius.

Main components
- Thermocouple probes (x 3)
- Indicator
- 1E-1S : Thermocouple junction box.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.10

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

THERMOCOUPLE
PROBES

GAS GENERATOR
TURBINE

1E/1S

1E-1S:THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX
1E/1S
1E-1S:
THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX

THERMOCOUPLE
PROBES

Except
1E/1S

Type:
Thermocouple probes
Indication:
Degrees Celsius

T4 TEMPERATURE
INDICATION

GENERAL

T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.11

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Thermocouple probes
Function
The thermocouple probes measure the gas temperature (T4)
at the gas generator outlet.

Position
- Around the rear part of the combustion chamber casing.

Function
The thermocouple junction box forms the interface between the
thermocouples and the indicator.

Position

Main characteristics

- On a bracket at the upper part of the power turbine.

- Type: Chromel - Alumel thermocouple

Main characteristics

- Quantity: 3

- Type: box with connectors.

- Connection: in parallel.

Functional description

Functional description
The 3 thermocouple probes are identical. They are positioned
to give a homogeneous measurement. Each probe contains a
hot junction (Chromel - Alumel wires soldered together).
The probes are connected in parallel either to the aircraft
indicator directly or through an amplifier providing analog and
digital outputs.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Thermocouple junction box (1E-1S)

The thermocouple junction box contains connection system of


Chromel - Alumel wires and provides a connection between
the thermocouple probes and the aircraft indicator.
It includes the connectors of the thermocouple probes (x 3)
and of the indicator.

Edition: April 2012

8.12

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

A thermocouple probe produces an electromotive force which


is proportional to the temperature difference between the hot
and the cold junction. The electromotive force is delivered to
the T4 indicator (galvanometer graduated in degrees Celsius).
The reading obtained is an average temperature.

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

1E-1S: THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX

1E/1S

Type:
Chromel - Alumel thermocouple

Type:
Box with connectors

Quantity:
3
Connection:
In parallel

Indicator
connector

Thermocouple
connector

Mounting
nut

1E/1S

Cable
1E-1S: THERMOCOUPLE
JUNCTION BOX
THERMOCOUPLE
PROBE

Chromel

Thermocouple
connectors
Cold
junction
INDICATOR

Hot
junction
Alumel

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

T4 MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.13

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

THERMOCOUPLE PROBES

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEM

Operation
General operation

Function
To provide an indication of the engine torque measured at the
reduction gearbox intermediate gear.

Position
- All the system components are located on the engine except
the torque indicator.

The reaction torque is transformed into axial force on the


reduction gear intermediate pinion. The force is transmitted to
a piston which determines an oil flow modulating a pressure
representative of the torque.
The pressure is transformed into electrical current supplied to
the indicator by a transmitter.

Torquemeter operation

- Type: hydraulic torquemeter

The torque on the output shaft is transmitted to the reduction


gearbox. The intermediate gear, which has helical teeth,
transmits the axial force to the piston, via the stop bearings.

Description

The movement of the intermediate gear/piston assembly varies


the oil flow between the piston and the tube base.

Main characteristics

The torquemeter piston is fitted into the hub of the intermediate


gear of the reduction gearbox on a stop bearing.

This pressure variation is felt by the torque transmitter.

The head of the piston fits into a cavity in the reduction gearbox
front casing. An oil tube passes through the hollow shaft of the
piston and forms a passage between the piston and the tube
base. Oil from the torquemeter system can pass through this
passage.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.14

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

TORQUEMETER
PISTON

INTERMEDIATE
GEAR

STOP
BEARING

OIL FLOW
VARIATION

INDICATOR

TRANSMITTER

RESTRICTOR

LIMITED
FLOW

OIL INLET
(pressure modulated
by the piston)

LUBRICATION
TUBE

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
OIL PUMP

TO ENGINE
LUBRICATION

FILTER

TORQUEMETER
PISTON

Type:
hydraulic torquemeter

GENERAL

TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.15

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

REDUCTION
GEARBOX
CASING

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEM
Note: The torque transmitter or the indicator (according to
version) is adjusted and matched to the reduction
gearbox.

Function
The transmitter transforms the hydraulic signal (modulated
pressure from the piston) into an electrical signal and transmits
it to the indicator.

Position
- Rear right hand side of the accessory gearbox.

Main characteristics
- Type: inductive or resistive (according to version).

Description
The system includes:
- A calibrated orifice
- A transmitter
- A pressure tapping point.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.16

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TORQUE TRANSMITTER

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

PUMP
PRESSURE
RESTRICTOR

TORQUEMETER PISTON
MODULATED PRESSURE
INDICATOR

Type:
Inductive or resistive
(according to version)
Note:

The torque transmitter or


the indicator (according to
version) is adjusted and
matched to the reduction
gearbox.

TRANSMITTER

PRESSURE
TAPPING

TORQUE TRANSMITTER

TORQUE MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.17

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
There are several indicators and instruments which give
information about the engine operation. These pages summarize
the various lights which have already been dealt with in other
chapters.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Position
- Engine
- On the instrument panel.

Main characteristics
- Indicating lights directly connected to engine sensors
- Indications provided by the aircraft
- Electrical measurement circuit directly connected to
indicators.

Main components
- Sensors and engine accessories (refer to corresponding
chapters for more information)

Lights directly connected to the engine


sensors
- Low oil pressure
- Bleed valve position
- Magnetic particles.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.18

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

+ 28 V

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Low oil pressure


Bleed valve position
Circuit breaker

Magnetic particles

ENGINE

INDICATING:
Fuel
Oil
Air
Power
Overspeed
Fire

HELICOPTER

GENERAL

MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.19

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
Operation

Function
The cycle counter automatically carries out the calculations
stated in the maintenance manual.

Main components

The input signal is the N1 speed supplied by a pick-up or by


the tachometer generator.
With this information, the system converts the engine actual
operating cycles into "reference cycles" and displays the
result.
For the power turbine, the relationship is: 1 cycle = 1 start.

- Tachometer box with failure indicator

It is then possible to calculate the number of cycles of life


limited parts.

- Display unit with N1 and N2 cycle displays


- Electrical connectors.

The electronic box corresponding to an engine variant can


perform some (or all) of the following functions:

Note: In the 1E and 1S versions, a same box ensures the


two functions of N2 overspeed protection and cycle
counter.

- Count engine operating cycles


- Control electro-pneumatic compressor bleed valve
- Protect against power turbine overspeed
- Monitor the power turbine.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.20

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CYCLE COUNTER

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FAILURE
INDICATOR

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

DISPLAY
UNIT

N1 AND N2
CYCLE DISPLAYS

N1, N2 AND 24 V
INPUT

Note: In the 1E and 1S versions, a same box ensures the two functions of N2 overspeed
protection and cycle counter.

CYCLE COUNTER

MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.21

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEMS- 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)

Recommended maintenance tasks

List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- After the last flight of the day


- Before the first flight of the day
- Pre-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

- Post-flight

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.22

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS
- Torquemeter transmitter
Inspection and check

Chap. 72

- N1 tachometer transmitter
Inspection and check

Chap. 77

- Pyrometric harness
Visual inspection
Test

Chap. 77
Chap. 77

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.23

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING


SYSTEMS- 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).
Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to
refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.24

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- N1 speed sensor (NG)


Removal / installation
- N2 speed sensor (NFT/NR)
Removal / installation
- Torquemeter transmitter
Removal / installation
Test
- Box and thermocouples
Removal / installation of a thermocouple
Removal / installation of the box
Inspection
- Tachometer unit and cycle counter
Counting function: test

Chap. 77
Chap. 77
Chap. 77
Chap. 77
Chap. 77
Chap. 77
Chap. 77
Chap. 77

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

8.25

MEASUREMENT AND INDICATING SYSTEMS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

9 - STARTING SYSTEM
- Starting system presentation.............................................................. 9.2
- Starter-generator................................................................................... 9.6
- Ignition system (74-00-00)..................................................................... 9.8
- Starting system - Operation................................................................. 9.10
- Starting system - 1st line maintenance.............................................. 9.14 - 9.17

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.1

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

STARTING SYSTEM PRESENTATION


Main components

Function

- Starter-generator (cranking)

The starting system ensures starting (on the ground and in flight)
and dry crank of the engine. It includes the following functions:
cranking, fuel supply and ignition.

- Ignition units and igniter plugs

Position
All the starting accessories are installed on the engine.
Indicating and control components are supplied by the aircraft
manufacturer.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

- Fuel system (supply, metering and delivery)


- Indicating and control system:
Electrical system
Instruments.

Main characteristics
- Starting envelope: according to version
- Start duration: between 25 and 30 sec.
- Max. dry crank time: 15 sec.
- Stabilisation time before shut-down: 60 sec.
- Run-down time: > 30 sec. from 30 to 0% N1.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.2

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Starting enveloppe:
According to version

IGNITION
UNITS

IGNITER
PLUGS

Start duration:
Between 25 and 30 sec.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

STARTER-GENERATOR

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Max. dry crank time:


15 sec.
Stabilisation time before shut-down:
60 sec.
CRANKING

Run-down time:
> 30 sec. from 30 to 0% N1

FUEL SUPPLY AND


DISTRIBUTION

IGNITION

START CONTROL
AND INDICATING

GENERAL

STARTING SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.3

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

STARTING SYSTEM PRESENTATION


The igniter plugs are installed close to the start injectors and
are connected to the ignition units by two cables.

Starter
The starter is electrically supplied with direct current from the
batteries through the aircraft electrical system.

Fuel system
The fuel system supplies fuel to the start and main injectors.

During starting, the starter drives the gas generator rotating


assembly through the accessory drive train.

Control and indicating system

At the end of starting, the electrical supply to the starter is


cut.

The control system includes:

The starter is installed on the front face of the gearbox


casing.

Ignition unit
The ignition units are of high energy type. They transform the
direct current voltage provided by the aircraft system into high
energy voltage required for the igniter plug operation.
The ignition units are located at the right side of the axial
compressor casing.

- The cockpit components (fuses or circuit-breakers, dry crank


and start push-buttons, the manual control lever)
- The supply (28 V battery)
- The accessory relay (to electrically supply the starting
accessories)
- The starter contactor
- The overspeed box (twin engine only).

Igniter plugs
The engine has two igniter plugs which ignite the air fuel mixture
sprayed by the start injectors.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.4

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

DESCRIPTION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

STARTERGENERATOR

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

DRY CRANK
PUSH-BUTTON

START
PUSH-BUTTON

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

STARTER
CONTACTOR

START INJECTOR
ELECTRO-VALVE

ACCESSORY
RELAY

OVERSPEED
BOX

IGNITION
UNITS

DESCRIPTION

STARTING SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.5

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

- Direct current supply to the aircraft system from the startergenerator when the starting phase is completed.

The starter cranks the gas generator rotating assembly during


starting and dry crank. At the end of starting (when the rotation
speed is sufficient), the starter operates as a Direct Current
generator.

Operation

Position
- On the front face of the accessory gearbox. It is secured by
a clamp.

Main characteristics
- Supplied by the aircraft manufacturer

Engine cranking
When "START" is selected the starter contactor closes and
connects the aircraft DC bus bar to the starter.
The starter then cranks the rotating assembly through the
accessory drive train.
The torque on the starter shaft is inversely proportional to the
gas generator speed and will be higher when the atmospheric
temperature is low.

- Type: starter-generator
- Supply: VDC through heavy duty cables (32 V max.)

The starter main components are:

The N1 increases up to self-sustaining speed (45%) at which


point the torque becomes negative. The supply to the starter
is cut by the opening of the starter contactor.

- The starter-generator

Electrical generation

Main components

- The mounting flange


- The supply terminals.

Interfaces
- Starter electrical supply from the + 28 VDC supply bus bar
through the starter contactor

At the end of the start cycle the starter is no longer electrically


supplied and it is driven by the gas generator through the
accessory drive train. Thus it acts as an electrical generator
and supplies current to the aircraft circuit.

- Drive of the gas generator rotating assembly through the


accessory drive train

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.6

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

STARTER-GENERATOR

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

DRIVE
SHAFT
STARTERGENERATOR
START
TORQUE
TORQUE WITH A DECREASING
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

Aircraft manufacturer's
supply
Type:
Starter-generator
Electrical supply:
VDC through heavy
duty cables (32 V max.)

45%
0

SELF-SUSTAINING SPEED
STARTER

STARTER-GENERATOR
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

N1

Edition: April 2012

GENERATOR

9.7

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TERMINALS

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Description

This system ignites the fuel that is sprayed into the combustion
chamber by the start injectors.

The ignition system includes the following components:

Position

- 2 ignition cables (identical, triple-braided, high energy)

With the exception of the electrical supply circuit, all the


components are fitted on the engine:

- 2 igniter plugs (surface-discharge type, incorporating a central


electrode insulated from the body, and a semi-conductor at
the tip).

- Ignition units: mounted on a support, on the front right-hand


side of the engine
- Ignition cables: between the ignition units and the igniter
plugs
- Igniter plugs: beside the start injectors, on either side of the
turbine casing.

Main characteristics
- Type: High Energy (HE)
- Supply voltage: 28 VDC

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

- 2 ignition units (identical, high energy)

Operation
The ignition units are supplied with the DC voltage from the
aircraft mains electrical system, and transform it into a highenergy voltage.
This high-energy voltage (approximately 2 kV) is then delivered
to the igniter plugs through the ignition cables.
The high-energy voltage produced by the ignition units is supplied
to the central electrode of the igniter plugs. It discharges between
the semi-conductor and the plug body causing powerful sparks.
These sparks ignite the fuel that is sprayed into the combustion
chamber by the start injectors.

Edition: April 2012

9.8

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

IGNITION SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Electrical connector
(connection with the ignition unit)
Seals and
spacers

Electrical connector
(to the ignition unit)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Electrical connector
(to the igniter plug)

External
body
Spark
Central
electrode
(+)

IGNITION
CABLE
Identification
plate

IGNITER
PLUG

Insulator
Semiconductor
START
INJECTORS

IGNITER
PLUG

Mounting
flanges
Type:
High Energy (HE)
IGNITION
UNITS

Supply voltage:
28 VDC

IGNITION SYSTEM
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

COMBUSTION
CHAMBER

9.9

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

STARTING SYSTEM
Dry crank cycle

Starting cycle
The starting cycle is characterised by the evolution of the
engine parameters, especially the rotation speed and the gas
temperature.

A dry crank consists of cranking the rotating assembly without


supplying fuel or ignition (dry crank). It is used for cooling the
engine or for maintenance procedures.
The dry crank cycle comprises the following phases:

The main points of the starting cycle are:

- Dry crank

- Start selection

- Cranking of the rotating assembly

- Self-sustaining speed (de-energisation of the starter and


ignition units)

- End of dry crank and run-down.

- End of start (stabilisation at min. power).

Note: Dry crank time is limited to 15 sec. to avoid overheating


of the starter motor.

Shut-down cycle
This cycle comprises the following points:
- Stabilisation at idle speed
- Stop selection
- Run-down and stop.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.10

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OPERATION (1)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

N1

Stop selection

Stabilisation
at idle speed
Starting
accessories

ACCESSORY
RELAY

Run-down

DRY CRANK SELECTION

Startergenerator

STARTER
CONTACTOR
N1

N2 100%

T4 gas
temperature

SHUT-DOWN CYCLE
N1

time

Dry crank cancel

N1 idle
Self-sustaining
speed

Approx. 200C
(injection wheel
supply)

Selection
STARTING CYCLE

time

Selection

(15 sec. max.)


DRY CRANK CYCLE

time

OPERATION (1)

STARTING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.11

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

START
SELECTION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

STARTING SYSTEM

Power supply of the helicopter "ON"

Stop

- Valves closed, metering needle closed by the cam.

- After stabilisation pull the control lever to the "stop" position:


the main valve closes. Note the run-down time.

Booster pumps switched on

Dry crank

- Purge of the fuel system with a return to the tank.

- Power supply switched on

Starting

- Press the dry crank push-button (max. 15 sec.):


power supply to the starter motor via the start
contactor.

- The control lever is moved to the "start" position:


slight opening of the main valve
- Pushing the start push button initiates the start by electrically
supplying:
the starter
the start injector electro-valve
the ignition system
- At 45% of N1 (self sustaining speed) it is necessary to release
the start push button to cut the supply to the start relay and
accessories.
Note: During the start it is necessary to control the acceleration
of the engine, with the control lever, and to observe the
N1 speed and T4 temperature.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.12

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OPERATION (2)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OPERATION (2)

STARTING SYSTEM
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.13

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

STARTING SYSTEM- 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)

Recommended maintenance tasks

List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- After the last flight of the day


- Before the first flight of the day
- Pre-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

- Post-flight

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.14

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS
- High-energy units
Inspection and check

Chap. 74

- Ignition cables
Inspection and check

Chap. 72

- Ignition plugs
Inspection and check

Chap. 72

- High-energy ignition units


Test

Chap. 72

- Starting system
Operational check

Chap. 72

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

STARTING SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.15

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

STARTING SYSTEM- 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).
Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to
refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.16

STARTING SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- Gas generator module


Removal / installation (post TU271A)
Ignition plugs: test
Starting system: operational check
- Accessory gearbox starter-generator adapter
Sealing ring: removal / installation
- High energy (H.E.) ignition units
Removal / installation

72-43-00
72-43-00
72-43-00
74-61-00
74-11-00

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

STARTING SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

9.17

STARTING SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

- Electrical system presentation............................................................ 10.2


- Power turbine overspeed protection system (80-10-01)................... 10.4
- Electrical harnesses............................................................................. 10.16
- Electrical system - 1st line maintenance............................................ 10.18 - 10.21

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.1

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

10 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Main components

The system contributes to the various indicating and control


functions of the engine:

- Engine electrical components (indicating components and


sensors)

- Indicating

- Control and indicating components (aircraft)

- Fuel control

- Electrical harnesses.

- Safety systems

Main characteristics
- Power supply: 28 VDC from aircraft electrical system

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.2

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PRESENTATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ELECTRICAL
HARNESSES

Power supply:
28 VDC from aircraft

ACCESSORIES
AND SENSORS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PRESENTATION


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED


PROTECTION SYSTEM

Description
The speed sensor is mounted facing two phonic wheels with
a different number of teeth, mounted on the turbine shaft. It is
connected to the tachometer box (in the aircraft).

Function
The safety system causes the immediate shut-down of the
engine in the event of power turbine overspeed.

The tachometer box electrically supplies the overspeed electrovalve on the overspeed and drain valve.

The system (mainly designed to protect against shearing of


the power shaft) requires a very quick response and a high
reliability.

Operation

This protection system is only installed on twin-engine


configurations.

In the event of an overspeed, when the tachometer box receives


two frequency signals, it energises the overspeed electro-valve
to move to drain position causing the engine shut-down.

Position
All the components are installed on the engine except the
tachometer box which is mounted on the aircraft.

Main characteristics
Overspeed setting: 120% N2
- Automatic test:
for each start
during periodic inspection.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.4

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Automatic test:
for each start
during priodic inspection

SPEED
SENSOR

PHONIC
WHEELS

TACHOMETER
BOX
OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE

This
protection system is
only installed on
twin-engine
configurations
OVERSPEED
ELECTRO-VALVE
SPEED
SENSOR

TACHOMETER
BOX

GENERAL

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.5

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Overspeed setting:
120% N2

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED SENSOR

Description

Function

The sensor is fitted facing the phonic wheels, it includes two


electro-magnetic pick-ups.

The power turbine overspeed sensor monitors N2 and transmits


the signal to the tachometer box (twin-engine versions).

The sensor is secured by a hollow bolt and is fitted with a


locating pin to ensure the correct orientation.

Position

Operation

Screwed into the bottom of module 4 casing.

The passage of the teeth in front of the electro-magnetic sensor


induces two alternating currents having a frequency proportional
to the speed and to the number of teeth:

Main characteristics
- Double pick-up
- Type: Electro-magnetic.

nd x N
F =

60
(nd = number of teeth, N = rotation speed in rpm, F=Frequency)
As the phonic wheels don't have the same number of teeth,
the double sensor gives two different frenquencies proportional
to the speed.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.6

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED


PROTECTION SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

TO THE TACHOMETER BOX

Type:
Electro-magnetic

F = nd x N
60

SENSOR

PHONIC WHEEL
PHONIC WHEELS

SENSOR
LOCATING
DOWEL

HOLLOW
BOLT
TACHOMETER
BOX

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
PICK-UP

PHONIC
WHEEL

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED SENSOR

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.7

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Double pick-up

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED


PROTECTION SYSTEM

Description
The tachometer box is mounted in the aircraft, it is connected
to the overspeed sensor by an electrical harness.

Function
To supply the overspeed electro-valve in case of an overspeed
detection and to control the operation of the bleed valve
(according to version).

Position

It includes two frequency detectors, a V relay, a bistable relay


S and S', a rearming and a test push-button.
A cross monitoring system between the two overspeed boxes
inhibits the overspeed system of the other engine in case of
overspeed.

- In the aircraft

Main characteristics
- Electronic box
- Automatic test
- Periodic test.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.8

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TACHOMETER BOX - GENERAL - DESCRIPTION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

TEST
OSCILLATOR

REARMING
PUSH-BUTTON

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

120%

N2

120%

N2

OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE
TEST
SELECTOR

ENGINE
SHUT-DOWN

INHIBITION OF THE STARTING


INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE
SYSTEM
25%

S'

TEST

REARMING

OVERSPEED
CONNECTOR

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
FOR THE COMPRESSOR
BLEED VALVE CONTROL

25%

EVENTUAL INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM

TACHOMETER BOX - GENERAL - DESCRIPTION

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.9

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TEST
PUSH-BUTTON

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED


PROTECTION SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (1)

Power on
At power on, the sensors give the F1 and F2 frequencies to
frequency detectors which supply the light through the mutual
monitoring system (up 25% of N2).
Rearming is possible.

Overspeed condition
In the event of N2 overspeed (N2 approx. 120%) the two signals
of N2 (F1 and F2) are supplied to the two frequency detectors
which complete the circuit through relay V.
Relay V closes its contacts:
supplying relay S
breaking the circuit of the other engine.
The contacts of relay S
open the other engine's overspeed circuit
supply the overspeed solenoid
open the start circuit
open the overspeed light circuit.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.10

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

TEST

POWER ON
- The light turns on (up to
25% of N2)
- Rearming (if necessary)

N2

120%

N2

OVERSPEED
- Supply of the
mono-stable relay V
- Supply of the bistable
relay S
- Supply of the overspeed
electro-valve
- Inhibition the other
engine system
- Inhibition of the starting

120%

OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE
ENGINE

INHIBITION OF THE STARTING

SHUT-DOWN

INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE


SYSTEM
25%

S'
REARMING

25%

EVENTUAL INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM


POWER ON
OVERSPEED

TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (1)

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.11

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OSCILLATOR

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED


PROTECTION SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (2)

Automatic monitoring (all versions except


1E and 1S)
The condition of the pick-up signals is checked at each start
with the light turning-off above 25% N2.

Periodic test
Engine stopped, operation of the push button simulates an
overspeed:
the light goes off
the electro-valve is supplied
the start system is inhibited
After this test it is necessary to rearm the system.

Rearming
When the rearm push button is pressed the relay S' is supplied
and the relay returns to the normal position.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.12

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

TEST
OSCILLATOR

- Supply of the oscillator


120% *
- Oscillator inhibited for
N2 > 25%

AUTOMATIC MONITORING
ALL VERSIONS EXCEPT
1E AND 1S: WHATEVER N1

120%

N2

120%

N2

OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE

N2 (x)

N2 (y)

OK

OK

Light off

OK

Light on

OK

Light on

Light on

ENGINE

INHIBITION OF THE STARTING

SHUT-DOWN

INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE


SYSTEM
25%

S'
REARMING

OVERSPEED MANUAL TEST

25%

EVENTUAL INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM


AUTOMATIC MONITORING

TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (2)

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.13

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OVERSPEED
MANUAL TEST

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED


PROTECTION SYSTEM
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (3)

Automatic monitoring (1E, 1S versions)


This protection doesn't exist on all boxes.
- Above 25% N2 and below 83% N1: the loss of one N2 speed
signal is indicated by the light staying "on".
- Above 25% N2 and 83% N1:
the loss of one N2 speed signal is also indicated by the
light staying "on"
the loss of two N2 speed signals causes the engine to
be shut down by the overspeed system.
- Above 25% N2.
the loss of the N1 speed signal or any defect of the
protection stage is indicated by the flashing of the light.
Note: In all cases of engine shut down by overspeed, starting
is not possible.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.14

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TEST

AUTOMATIC MONITORING
1S, 1E VERSIONS:
N1 < 83%
N2 (x)

N2 (y)

OK

OK

Light off

OK

Light on

OK

Light on

Light on

OSCILLATOR

120%

N2

120%

N2

OVERSPEED ELECTRO-VALVE

N1 > 83%

ENGINE

N2 (x)

N2 (y)

OK

OK

Light off

OK

Light on

OK

Light on

Engine shut-down
N2 > 25%

SHUT-DOWN

INHIBITION OF THE STARTING


INHIBITION OF THE OTHER ENGINE
SYSTEM
25%

S'
REARMING

1S, 1E
VERSION

25%

N1
OK
0

Light off

83%

N1

Light flashing
1E, 1S VERSION MONITORING

EVENTUAL INHIBITION OF THIS SYSTEM

TACHOMETER BOX - OPERATION (3)

POWER TURBINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.15

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ELECTRICAL HARNESSES

Harnesses link the engine accessories to the aircraft.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Function

Description and operation


All engine versions have a multi-pin plug for the engine/aircraft
interface and a second electrical plug for the pyrometric system
(except on ARRIEL 1S1: only one electrical plug for the two
harnesses).
On the twin-engine version: a harness for the speed detection
to stop the engine in case of overspeed.
Note: The starter-generator cables must also be mentioned.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.16

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

SPEED DETECTION
HARNESS FOR THE
OVERSPEED SYSTEM
(twin-engine version)

PYROMETRIC
HARNESS

ACCESSORY
HARNESS

ARRIEL 1S1: only one connector

ELECTRICAL HARNESSES
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Edition: April 2012

10.17

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM- 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)

Recommended maintenance tasks

List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- After the last flight of the day


- Before the first flight of the day
- Pre-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

- Post-flight

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.18

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

SERVICING INSPECTIONS
AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS
- Check locking of the connectors

MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS


- Control harness
Visual inspection

Chap. 71

- Free turbine: overspeed protection system


Test

Chap. 77

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.19

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM- 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).
Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to
refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.20

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- Overspeed sensor
Removal / installation
Test
- Tachometer and cycle counter
Test No. 1: FT overspeed protection
and monitoring system
Test No. 2: FT monitoring system
Test No. 3: cycle counting function

Chap. 77
Chap. 77
Chap. 74
Chap. 74
Chap. 74

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

10.21

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

- Engine compartment............................................................................ 11.2


- Engine mounting and lifting (71-20-01)............................................... 11.4
- Air intake and exhaust system............................................................ 11.6
- Engine/airframe system interfaces..................................................... 11.8
- Drains - Air vents.................................................................................. 11.16
- Power drive (72-11-02).......................................................................... 11.18
- Fire protection (26-12-00)..................................................................... 11.20
- Engine installation - 1st line maintenance......................................... 11.22 - 11.25

(XX-XX-XX): Page references which deal with the subject in the maintenance documentation.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.1

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

11 - ENGINE INSTALLATION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Description

The engine compartment accommodates the engines and


ensures their ventilation.

A typical twin-engine installation includes the following


components:

Position
- At the rear of the helicopter main gearbox.

Main characteristics
- Insulated compartments
- Compartment ventilation by air circulation.

Main components
- Firewalls
- Cowlings
- Support platform.

- Two areas separated by a central firewall:


Right engine area
Left engine area
- Three main firewalls:
Front firewall
Rear firewall
Central firewall.
- The main engine mountings
- Two main cowlings:
The air inlet cowling which permits access to the air
intake
The engine cowling which permits access to the engine
and to the exhaust system.
The compartment ventilation is ensured by air circulation in order
to maintain an acceptable temperature in the various areas.
The ventilation can be increased by the compressor bleed valve
air discharging into the engine compartment.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.2

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ENGINE

SUPPORT
PLATFORM

FRONT
FIREWALL

ENGINE
MOUNTING

AIR INLET
COWLING

MAIN
GEARBOX

EXAMPLE OF SINGLE ENGINE


INSTALLATION

REAR
FIREWALL

ENGINE
COWLING

EXAMPLE OF TWIN-ENGINE
INSTALLATION

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

CENTRAL
FIREWALL

Edition: April 2012

11.3

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

- Insulated compartments
- Compartment ventilation
by air circulation

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE MOUNTING

ENGINE LIFTING

Function

Function

The engine mountings attach the engine to the airframe.

The lifting rings are used to lift the engine.

Description
- Front mounting: at the front lower part of the accessory
gearbox casing,

Description
- 3 lifting rings: 2 at the front and 1 at the rear.

- Rear mounting: at the front lower part of the reduction gearbox


casing, or on the protection tube (according to version).

Engine removal and installation

Functional description

Turbomeca supplies an engine lifting beam which attaches to


the lifting rings on the engine.

The front and rear engine mountings differ according to the


engine variant concerned.
- All variants except E-K-S:
Front mounting - ring of bolts on the front support casing
front flange
Rear mounting - a cradle under the protection tube,
secured by two clamps

This allows the engine to be removed from and installed in the


airframe.
The removal/installation procedure is described in the Airframe
Maintenance Manual and must only be carried out in accordance
with this procedure and using the appropriate tooling.

- Variants E-K-S:
Front mounting - yoke bolted to the front face of the
accessory gearbox, supported on two trunnion mounts,
Rear mounting - a rod connects to the bracket on the
bottom of module M05.
- Variant E:
Front mounting: 2 lateral supports fitted on the accessory
gearbox

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.4

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ENGINE MOUNTING AND LIFTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

MOUNTING BY
CLAMPS ON THE
PROTECTION TUBE

ENGINE LIFTING
BEAM

ALL VARIANTS EXCEPT E-K-S

ALL VARIANTS EXCEPT E-K-S

REAR LIFTING
RING

FRONT LIFTING
RINGS

MOUNTING BY TWO
ATTACHMENT
POINTS ON THE
AIRFRAME
VARIANTS E-K-S

REAR
MOUNTING
VARIANT E

ENGINE MOUNTING AND LIFTING


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

VARIANTS E-K-S

11.5

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MOUNTING BY THE
FRONT SUPPORT
CASING FRONT FLANGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Air intake

Exhaust system

Function

Function

The air intake system directs the ambient air into the engine.

The exhaust system discharges the exhaust gas overboard.

Position

Position

- In front of the engine.

- At the rear of the engine.

Main characteristics

Main characteristics

- Type: Static or dynamic, annular

- Type: divergent

- Airflow: 2.5 kg/sec. (5.5 lb/sec.).

- Gas temperature: 600C (1080F).

Main components

Main components

- Helicopter air intake

- Engine exhaust pipe

- Intake duct

- Exhaust extension.

- Anti-icing system.

Functional description

Functional description

The exhaust expels the gases directly but it can be adapted to


the aircraft by means of an extension. The engine compartment
ventilation can be accelerated by venturi effect between the
engine exhaust pipe and the aircraft duct.

A circular flange on the compressor casing permits connection


of the aircraft air intake duct. The admission of air can be made
through a static or a dynamic intake which can be provided with
protection devices (filters, anti-icing...). A pressurised seal can
also be fitted to improve the connection sealing. Some versions
are provided with a device for compressor washing.
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.6

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

AIR INTAKE
Type:
Static or dynamic, annular

EXHAUST SYSTEM
Type:
Divergent

Airflow:
2,5 kg/sec. (5.5 lb/sec.)

Gas temperature:
600C (1080F)

AIR
DUCT

ANTI-ICING

EXHAUST
PIPE

SEAL

FILTER

VENTURI TO ACCELERATE
THE COMPARTMENT
VENTILATION

UNION FOR
COMPRESSOR WASHING

AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

EXTENSION

Edition: April 2012

11.7

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES


For each engine, the oil system has three interfaces as
follows:

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OIL SYSTEM

- Oil return line to the aircraft oil cooler


- Oil supply line to the oil pump pack
- The vent line: from the oil tank to the accessory gearbox and
to the exhaust.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.8

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

AIRCRAFT

BREATHING
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

OIL
SUPPLY

ENGINE
OIL RETURN
TO THE COOLER

OIL SYSTEM

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.9

ENGINE INSTALLATION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

AIRCRAFT LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM

Functional description

Function

The interface comprises the union on the FCU and return to tank
union. The aircraft system may include various devices: vent,
level indication, filler neck, booster pump, pressure indicator,
flowmeter. The booster pump will prime the engine system and
prevent cavitation of the pump.

The system supplies the engine with fuel under determined


conditions of pressure, flow, temperature and filtering.

Main characteristics
- Filtering 10 microns.

Main components

The filtering unit, normally fitted with a pre-blockage indicator


and a by-pass valve is in the line before the shut-off valve which
is used to isolate the engine compartment from the aircraft
system.

- Fuel tank
- Booster pump (except 1S)

Note: In the 1E, 1S versions, the fuel inlet union is located on


the LP fuel system, located under the engine.

- Filter assembly
- Fuel shut-off valve
- Fuel inlet union
- Return to tank union.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.10

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course
TO HP PUMP
(FCU)

FUEL INLET
UNION
FUEL SHUT-OFF
VALVE

RETURN TO
TANK UNION
FUEL SUCTION
FROM TANK

FILTER UNIT
(filtering 10 microns)

FUEL
TANK

1E, 1S VERSIONS

BOOSTER
PUMP
(except 1S)

AIRCRAFT LOW PRESSURE FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.11

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES


Functional description

Function
To allow the control of the fuel valves and of the anticipator.

Position
The engine control lever and the collective pitch lever are in the
cockpit and are mechanically connected to the FCU.

- Engine control lever (lever actuating 2 valves and a cam


in the fuel control unit: see chapter "FUEL SYSTEM" and
aircraft manuals for the mechanical linkage).
- Anticipator control (linkage with the helicopter collective pitch:
see operation of the anticipator in the chapter "CONTROL
SYSTEM" and details of the mechanical connection in the
aircraft manuals).

Main components
- Control lever
- Collective pitch lever
- Fuel control unit.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.12

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

MANUAL CONTROLS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

FUEL VALVE
CONTROL

CONTROL LEVER

ANTICIPATOR
CONTROL

COLLECTIVE
PITCH LEVER

MANUAL CONTROLS

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.13

ENGINE INSTALLATION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES


Possible uses of the air

Function

- Cabin heating

The system provides warm compressed air to the aircraft for


the aircraft services.

- Pressurised seal

Position

- Particle separator...

One tapping boss on each side of the centrifugal compressor


casing.

Main components

- Air intake anti-icing

Note: Refer to aircraft manuals for detailed description of these


systems.

Air tapping points (x 2).

Functional description
Aircraft pipes can be connected to the two tapping points to
supply a given flow of P2 air. The flow is limited by restrictors
but any air bleed affects engine performance.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.14

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

AIR SYSTEM

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

P2 TAPPING

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

P2

AIR SYSTEM

ENGINE/AIRFRAME SYSTEM INTERFACES


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.15

ENGINE INSTALLATION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Description

To drain fluids from certain engine components.

A drain collector is fitted on a bracket at the bottom of the


accessory gearbox casing and is connected by a flexible pipe
to an aircraft drain.

Position
- Various pipelines on the engine connected to the aircraft
drain system.

Four drain tubes are connected to the drain collector, the output
casing drain, the pump drive drain, the combustion chamber
drain and the overspeed and drain valve.

Main characteristics

The gas generator rear bearing vent pipe vents into the engine
compartment.

- Stainless steel tubes.

Main components
- Combustion chamber drain valve
- General vent
- F.C.U. drive drain
- Overspeed and drain valve

The engine breather comprises a T union on the upper right


side of the accessory gearbox. Connected to the front of this
union is the oil tank breather and to the rear, the pipe which
discharges into the exhaust.
The rear bearing supply collector has a drain into the engine
compartment.
The exhaust pipe drain connects into a pipe which is connected
to an aircraft overboard drain.

- Exhaust pipe drain


- Output shaft casing drain
- Air vent of the gas generator rear bearing
- Rear bearing collector drain.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.16

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

DRAINS - AIR VENTS

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

COMBUSTION CHAMBER
DRAIN VALVE

GAS GENERATOR
REAR BEARING
AIR VENT

GENERAL
VENT

REAR BEARING
COLLECTOR DRAIN

OVERSPEED AND
DRAIN VALVE

FCU DRIVE
DRAIN

OUTPUT SHAFT
CASING DRAIN
TO FUEL
TANK
TO AIRCRAFT

EXHAUST PIPE
DRAIN
OVERSPEED AND
DRAIN VALVE
(post TU262)

DRAINS - AIR VENTS


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.17

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Function

Functional description

The power drive transmits the engine power to the helicopter


transmission system.

The engine drive shaft consists of a steel tube, fitted with the
following elements at each end:

The link is made by a transmission shaft designed to absorb


the engine torque and slight misalignements (supply by aircraft
manufacturer or TURBOMECA according to version)

- A triangular flange connected to the MGB input flange with


a flexible coupling

Position

The flexible couplings are installed between the flanges. They


transmit torque, absorb shock and vibration and allow slight
misalignment.

- Between the engine and the helicopter main gearbox.

Main characteristics
- Shaft designed to absorb the engine torque and slight
misalignments
- Rotation speed: 6000 rpm at 100%.

- A splined flange, connected to an adaptor flange which is


connected to the engine drive shaft flange with a flector.

Note: In single engine versions, the free wheel unit drives the
main gearbox and the tail rotor shaft drive.

Main components
The main components are:
The engine drive shaft flange
The flector (engine end)
The adapting flange
The drive shaft
The flexible coupling (MGB end)
The main gearbox input flange.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.18

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

POWER DRIVE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

ENGINE
DRIVE-FLANGE

DRIVE
SHAFT

1S VERSION

Shaft designed to
absorb the engine
torque and slight
misalignments
Rotation speed:
6000 rpm at 100%

SPLINES

ADAPTOR FLANGE
(splined)
FLEXIBLE
COUPLING
MAIN GEARBOX
INPUT FLANGE
1E VERSION

POWER DRIVE
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.19

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

FLECTOR

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FIRE PROTECTION
Fire detectors

Function
The fire detection system detects overtemperature in the engine
compartment and gives a cockpit indication. An extinguishing
system is installed in the aircraft.

Main characteristics
- Engine manufacturer's supply (except 1S)
Bi-metallic detectors,

Some detectors have a built-in resistor in parallel which permits


the discrimination of circuit conditions (all versions except 1A,
1B, 1E and 1S): normal, overtemp, harness failed.
In the case of detectors with normally closed contact, the
detectors are installed in series and have a setting which
corresponds to the engine area of location ("cold" area or "hot"
area) and thus they are not interchangeable.

- Aircraft manufacturer's supply


Optical detectors (1S only)
Indicating system
Extinguishing system.

Extinguishing system (only on twin engine


aircraft)

Description
- Engine: six detectors (except: 1E: one detector, 1S: no
detector) and the harness (fire proof cables),
- Aircraft: two detectors (1S only), extinguishing system and
a test system.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

The detection is ensured by non sealed detectors with normally


closed contact (all versions except 1E and 1S) or one sealed
detector with normally open contact (1E) or by means of an
aircraft mounted optical device (1S).

The fire extinguishing system includes an extinguisher bottle and


spraying jets. The extinguishing system can be operated from
the cockpit (system supplied by the aircraft manufacturer).
Note: Refer to the aircraft manual for more information on the
extinguishing system.

Edition: April 2012

11.20

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Fire detection

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

1E
(1 detector)

NON SEALED DETECTOR


(all versions except 1E and 1S)

1S (2 detectors on aircraft)

SEALED DETECTOR
(1E and after TU 294)

POSITION OF DETECTORS
Area 1 (cold)

+
Alarm

Area 2 (hot)

Detection

Engine manufacturers
supply (except 1S):
Bi-metallic detectors
Aircraft manufacturers
supply:
Optical dtectors (1S only)
Indicating system
Extinguishing system

logic
+
Test button

EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
(bottle, manifold... )
(only on twin engine helicopters)

+
Extinguishing
button

Aircraft

Engine
PRINCIPLE OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

FIRE PROTECTION
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.21

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

All versions except 1E and 1S (6 detectors)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE INSTALLATION- 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE

Mandatory maintenance tasks

Refer to Maintenance Manual (chapter 05).

List of maintenance tasks considered by the manufacturer as


having to be carried out, although they do not directly affect
flight safety.

Servicing inspections (except 1E2)

Recommended maintenance tasks

List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:

List of maintenance tasks that are advised by the engine


manufacturer in order to improve reliability, increase availability
and reduce the operating cost of the engine.

- After the last flight of the day


- Before the first flight of the day
- Pre-flight

Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to


refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

- Post-flight

Servicing inspections (1E2)


List of maintenance tasks to be carried out:
- Before the first flight of the day
- Between two flights
- After 15 flight hours or 7 days.

Imperative maintenance tasks


List of maintenance tasks to performed to meet the Airworthiness
objectives.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.22

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

SERVICING INSPECTIONS

MANDATORY MAINTENANCE TASKS

AFTER 15 FLIGHT HOURS OR 7 DAYS


- Make sure there are no foreign objects (air intake,
exhaust system)

- Fire detection system


Inspection

Chap. 26

- Fire detector
Visual inspection

Chap. 26

RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE TASKS


- Removed fire detector
Inspection

Chap. 26

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ENGINE INSTALLATION - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.23

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ENGINE INSTALLATION- 1ST LINE


MAINTENANCE
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
List of maintenance tasks to be carried out when required (in
the event of an operating anomaly).
Note: Before carrying out any maintenance tasks, remember to
refer to the latest Service Bulletins and Service Letters.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.24

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
(non exhaustive list)

- Fire detection
Inspection / Check
- Fire detectors and support
Removal / installation
- Vibration
- Control and monitoring harness
- Control and monitoring harness - Fire
detectors
- Drain system - pipes and unions

Chap. 26
Chap. 26
Chap. 71
Chap. 71
Chap. 71
Chap. 71

Before
carrying out any
maintenance tasks, remember
to refer to the latest Service
Bulletins and Service
Letters.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

ENGINE INSTALLATION - 1ST LINE MAINTENANCE


For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

11.25

ENGINE INSTALLATION

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

- General ................................................................................................... 12.2


- Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 12.4
- Conclusion ............................................................................................ 12.10 - 12.11

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.1

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

12 - TROUBLESHOOTING

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Introduction

Repair procedure

Troubleshooting is a very important aspect of maintenance.

The repair procedure should be guided by two main


considerations:

It allows the probable cause(s) of a failure to be identified.


Efficient diagnosis reduces the extra maintenance costs due to
unjustified removals and additional diagnosis time.
In fact, even with a very high-reliability product, failure is inevitable
and required actions should be taken efficiently.

- Minimum downtime
- Justified removal of components.
The procedure to be applied depends on the case concerned
but, in general, good knowledge of the product and methodical
research allows a safe diagnosis and quick corrective action.
Generally, the procedure includes the identification of the failure,
its analysis, the isolation of the non-conforming component, and
the choice of the repair to be applied.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.2

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

GENERAL

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Inevitable

Random

Failure
(single, double,
dormant)

Troubleshooting/
repair
- Diagnosis
- Remedy
- Repair
- Check

MTTR
(Mean Time To Repair)

- Appropriate means and


procedures
- Training of personnel

Symptoms (additional information, etc.)


Do not neglect any components and take
interactions into consideration.
Analysis of the anomaly
Isolation of the non-conforming component
Or other
perception

Additional
checks

Total time required for


troubleshooting / repair

Substitution

Remedy
(adjustment, replacement, cleaning, repair)

GENERAL
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Deduction

Edition: April 2012

12.3

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06

On selection of start, N1 increase, but no increase in T4

The ignition
system operates
(noise of HE components)

Yes

No

Note: Refer to the test


procedure in order
to discriminate

Possible start on
1 injector +
1 igniter plug if
on the same side
Note:

Yes

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

It is also possible to check the


fuel flow through the combustion
chamber drain valve.

Fuel flow

No

STARTING ANOMALIES (1)

TROUBLESHOOTING

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.4

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06

T4
approx. 200C

Abnormal T4 rise

T4 > 200C
but not sufficient

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

T4
too high

Increase due to the


injectors, but the
main system is not
supplied

Note: In all cases, check the electrical supply


(battery voltage).

STARTING ANOMALIES (2)

TROUBLESHOOTING

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.5

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Crank selection
(press and hold)

REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06

Note: 15 sec. max. to avoid starter


overheat
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

N1 indication
No
Yes
The starter turns
Yes

No

The gas generator


is driven
Yes

Starting is
possible

No
Yes

"Normal"
crank

No

ANOMALIES DURING CRANKING

TROUBLESHOOTING

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.6

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06

Abnormal oil pressure indication

Low pressure

Yes

No pressure

Low oil
pressure light
illuminated?

Variation

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

High pressure

No

LUBRICATION ANOMALIES

TROUBLESHOOTING

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.7

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06

Uncommanded shut-down

Operation
of the power turbine
overspeed safety
system

Yes

Yes

Actual overspeed

N2, N1, TRQ, T4, oil pressure decrease


Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

No

No

Doubt

Note: Unlikely

Note: In a twin engine configuration, the engine which remains in


operation supplies the required power within its limits.

ANOMALIES LEADING TO IN-FLIGHT SHUT-DOWN

TROUBLESHOOTING

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.8

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

REFER TO THE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 71-00-06

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Abnormal gas generator rotation speed N1

Uncommanded
acceleration

Overspeed

Uncommanded
deceleration

Incorrect
response time

Fluctuations

Note: If one engine remains at a


fixed speed, while the second
engine operates normally, this
indicates a major failure
("frozen" metering unit)

MISCELLANEOUS CASES

TROUBLESHOOTING
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.9

TROUBLESHOOTING

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Despite the high reliability of the product, failures remain


inevitable and happen at random. But their rate and effects
can be reduced if the "enemies" of the engine are taken into
consideration.

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

CONCLUSION

When the failure occurs, you have to be in a position to correct


it.

"Enemies" of the engine


The traditional adverse conditions for this type of engine are:
- Supply (oil, air, fuel, electricity):
Oil: not in conformity with spec., contamination
Air: sand, salt, pollutions
Fuel: not in conformity with spec., contaminations
Electricity: low voltage, connectors, interference
- Operation ("non respect" of instructions and procedures,
severe operating conditions)
- Maintenance ("non respect" of inspection frequencies, various
mistakes, wrong logistic).

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.10

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

FUEL

ELECTRICITY

- Not in conformity with


specifications
- Water in fuel
- Sulphur + salt in the air =
sulphidation

- Too low voltage


during starting
- Interference

AIR

OPERATION

- Sand
- Salt
- Pollutions

- "Non respect" of instructions


and procedures
- Severe operating conditions

OIL

MAINTENANCE

- Not in conformity
with specifications
- Contaminations

- "Non respect" of inspection


frequencies
- Various mistakes
- Wrong logistic

CONCLUSION
For training purposes only
Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

12.11

TROUBLESHOOTING

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

- Introduction........................................................................................... 13.2
- Questionnaire 1..................................................................................... 13.3
- Questionnaire 2..................................................................................... 13.6
- Questionnaire 3..................................................................................... 13.12
- Questionnaire 4...................................................................................... 13.15 - 13.28

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.1

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

13 - CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Method

Types of questionnaires

Continuous checking helps to ensure the information is


assimilated. It is more a method of work than a testing in the
traditional sense.

Several types of questionnaire can be employed during a


course:

Objectives of the questionnaires

- "Short answer" questionnaire

The questionnaires permit a progressive assimilation and long


term retention. The questionnaires are a subject for discussion
(effects of group dynamics). They also permit students to consider
important subjects several times under different aspects.

- Multi Choice Questionnaire (MCQ)

Integration into the training programme


- First hour every day for revision of the subjects previously
studied
- After each chapter (or module) of the course
- At the end of the training course.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

- Traditional written questionnaire

- Oral questionnaire
- Learning Through Teaching(LTT; the student has to explain
a given subject).

Examination
The final examination at the end of the course consists of three
tests: written, oral and practical. A certificate and an approval
card are given to the student if the results are satisfactory.

Edition: April 2012

13.2

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

INTRODUCTION

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

This traditional questionnaire is established according to the


same plan as the training notes in which the answers can be
found.

Power plant
1 - List the main functional components of the power plant.
2 - Explain the thermodynamic operation of the engine.
3 - 
State the following features (at take-off, in standard
atmosphere):
Power on the shaft
Output shaft rotation speed
Mass of the engine with specific equipment.
4 - Explain the principle of engine adaptation to helicopter
power requirements.

Engine
1 - List the main components of the gas generator.
2 - State the following characteristics:
Compression ratio
Turbine entry temperature
N2 speed at 100%
N1 speed at 100%
3 - Describe the power turbine assembly.
4 - Describe the fuel injection system.
5 - List the engine driven accessories.
6 - List the bearings which support the gas generator.
7 - Describe the system used for bearing sealing.

5 - List the main operating ratings.

8 - Describe the modular construction of the engine.

6 - 
How do temperature and altitude affect the engine
performance.

9 - Describe the engine air intake.

7 - List the main aspects of the maintenance concept.

10 - 
List the manufacturing materials of the engine main
components.

8 - List the technical publications used for engine maintenance.


9 - Name the LRUs of the air system.
10 - Explain the attachment of each of the modules.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.3

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 1

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

QUESTIONNAIRE 1 (continued)
Oil system

Control system
1 - List the main functions of the control system.

2 - Explain the general operation of the oil system.

2 - Explain the basic principle of the control system.

3 - Describe the oil filter assembly.

3 - Explain the operating principle of the speed control.

4 - State the location of strainers and magnetic plugs.

4 - Describe the purpose and operation of the anticipator


control.

Air system
1 - List the functions ensured by the internal air system
(secondary system).

5 - Explain the operation of the acceleration controller.

2 - List the function of the various air tappings.


3 - Why are the start injectors ventilated?

7 - Describe and explain the operation of the power turbine


overspeed system.

4 - Explain the purpose and the operation of the compressor


bleed valve.

8 - Describe the principle of load sharing in a twin engine


configuration.

Fuel system

Measurement and indicating systems

1 - What is the purpose of the Booster pump.

6 - What are the main sections of the FCU.

1 - Describe the power turbine speed indicating system.

2 - Describe the fuel pump.

2 - Explain the operating principle of the torquemeter system.

3 - Describe the fuel metering unit.

3 - Describe the gas temperature indicating system.

4 - What is the purpose of the constant P valve.


5 - Explain the principle of fuel injection (main and starting
injection).
6 - Explain the operation of the overspeed & drain valve.
7 - Describe the manual control system.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.4

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

1 - Draw a simplified diagram of the oil system.

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

Starting system

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 1 (continued)

1 - Describe the cranking function of the engine.


2 - Describe the ignition system (ignition unit and igniter
plugs).
3 - List the main phases of the starting cycle.
4 - Describe the starting control electrical system.

Electrical system
1 - List the engine electrical accessories.
2 - List the sensors (state the type of signal produced).
3 - Describe the electrical harnesses and connectors.

Engine installation
1 - Describe the attachment of the engine to the aircraft.
2 - Describe the engine power drive and the power
transmission.
3 - List the various engine / aircraft interfaces.
4 - Describe the fire protection system of the engine.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.5

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

QUESTIONNAIRE 2
The student can answer orally or in the space provided for the
answers.

Questions

Answers

Answers

10 - Flight envelope - Max. altitude?


11 - Flight envelope Max. temperature?
12 - Start envelope - Max. altitude?

1 - ARRIEL 1 power class?

13 - Engine air flowat 100% N1?

2 - Power turbine rotation speed at


100%?

14 - Overall compression ratio?

3 - Type of main fuel injection?


4 - Number of engine modules?
5 - Number of power turbine stages?
6 - Meaning of AEO?

15 - Max. turbine entry temperature?


16 - Gas generator rotation speed at
100% N1?
17 - Direction of rotation of the gas
generator?

7 - Mass of the equipped engine?

18 - Direction of rotation of the power


turbine?

8 - Power evolution when altitude


increases?

19 - Manufacturing material for the axial


compressor?

9 - Torque evolution function of N2


rotation speed?

20 - What type of bearing is the axial


compressor bearing?

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

The following questions require short and accurate answers.

Questions

Edition: April 2012

13.6

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Questions

21 - How is the axial compressor mounted


on the gas generator module?
22 - Axial compressor compression ratio?
23 - Manufacturing material for the
centrifugal compressor wheel?

Answers

Questions

Answers

30 - Type of gas generator rear bearing?


31 - Type of power turbine front bearing?
32 - To which module does the power
turbine nozzle guide vane belong?
33 - Type of power turbine?

24 - Number of stages of the centrifugal


compressor diffuser?

34 - Does the exhaust pipe belong to one


module (yes or no)?

25 - Type of combustion chamber?

35 - Type of exhaust pipe attachment?

26 - Manufacturing material for the


combustion chamber?

36 - Number of gears in the reduction


gearbox?

27 - Type of main fuel injection?

37 - Rotation speed of the intermediate gear


of the reduction gearbox?

28 - Pressure drop in the combustion


chamber?
29 - Number of stages of the gas generator
turbine?

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

38 - Number of driven accessories on the


accessory gearbox?
39 - Manufacturing material for the
accessory gearbox casing?

Edition: April 2012

13.7

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Questions

Answers

Questions

Answers

40 - Is the oil pressureadjustable?

50 - Setting of the low oil pressure switch?

41 - Number of pumps in the oil pump


pack?

51 - Max. oil temperature?

42 - Type of oil pumps?


43 - What is the setting of the check valve
at the pressure pump outlet?
44 - Filtering ability of the oil filter?
45 - Setting of the oil filter by-pass valve?
46 - Which bearings are ball bearings?
47 - Type of seal for the gas generator rear
bearing sealing?
48 - Max. oil consumption?
49 - Type of oil pressure transmitter?

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

52 - Location of the centrifugal breather?


53 - Air tapping for the pressurisation of
the power turbine front bearing?
54 - Air pressure at the centrifugal
compressor outlet?
55 - Temperature at the centrifugal
compressor outlet?
56 - When does the start injector ventilation
begin?
57 - Max. air tapping flow?
58 - Type of compressor bleed valve?
59 - Position of the bleed valve during
starting?

Edition: April 2012

13.8

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Questions

Answers

Questions

Answers

60 - What are the bleed valve control


signals?

71 - How is the anticipator signal


transmitted?

61 - Where is the bleed valve fitted?

72 - Setting of the fuel pressurising valve?

62 - Type of fuel filter?


63 - Filtering ability of the fuel filter?
64 - Setting of the fuel filter by-pass
valve?
65 - Type of fuel pump?
66 - Position of the pump pressure relief
valve in normal engine running?
67 - Type of fuel metering device?
68 - Position of the constant P valve when
the engine is stopped?

73 - Fuel flow through the start injectors?


74 - Number of start injectors?
75 - Position of the combustion chamber
drain valve when the engine is
stopped?
76 - Type of fuel control system?
77 - Signals for the acceleration controller
78 - Average response time of the control
system

69 - Type of manual fuel flow control?

79 - Is the static droop compensated

70 - Type of valve for injector


ventilation?

80 - Position of the main valve with lever in


emergency plus

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Edition: April 2012

13.9

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Questions

81 - Meaning of OEI?
82 - Type of N2 controller?
83 - Position of the auxiliary valve with
the lever in the emergency minus
range?
84 - Closing threshold of the reinjection
prohibition switch
85 - What keeps the metering needle
closed when the control lever is
closed?
86 - Position of the manual control lever in
normal engine running?

Answers

Questions

Answers

91 - Where is the oil pressure transmitter


located?

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

92
- H o w a r e t h e t h e r m o c o u p l e s
connected(parallel or series)?
93 - Location of the torquemeter?
94 - Type of torque transmitter?
95 - Type of signal output by the transmitter
sensor?
96 - Is the torque transmitter associated
with a particular module?
97 - Type of starter?

87 - Type of speed sensors?

98 - Type of ignition system?

88 - What is the average torque pressure at


100% torque ?

99 - Gas generator rotation speed at starter


cut-off?

89 - How does the low oil pressure switch


sense the pressure?
90 - Number of thermocouple probes?

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.10

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 2 (continued)
Questions

100 - Number of igniter plugs?


101 - Max. duration of a ventilation?
102 - Is the ignition cable integral with the
igniter plug?

Answers

Questions

Answers
Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and
not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

111 - Max. gas temperature during


starting?
112 - Low oil pressure switch setting?
113 - Min. electrical supply voltage before
starting?

103 - Number of electrical connectors?


114 - Meaning of LRU?
104 - Location of the tachometer box?
115 - Meaning of TBO?
105 - Type of seal on the power shaft?
106 - Type of connection engine/MGB?
107 - Number of engine drains?

116 - Is borescopic inspection of the


combustion chamber possible?
117 - Is there an adjustment of the
torquemeter?

108 - Engine operating envelope; min. and


max. altitude pressure?
109 - Max. starting altitude?
110 - Power turbine max. overspeed?

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.11

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

This multi-choice questionnaire is used to review, in a relatively


short time, certain important points and to test the acquired
knowledge.
Answers to the questions can be found at the end of the
questionnaire.
1 - The ARRIEL 1 engine is:
a) a free turbine turboshaft engine
b) a turbo-jet engine
c) a fixed turbine turboshaft engine.
2 - Section of passage of the compressor diffusers:
a) regular
b) divergent
c) convergent.
3 - Type of combustion chamber:
a) annular with centrifugal injection
b) annular, reverse flow
c) annular, indirect flow.
4 - The power turbine nozzle guide vane belongs to:
a) module M04
b) module M03
c) module M02
5 - Type of exhaust pipe attachment:
a) bolts
b) mounting pads
c) clamp.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

6 - How many bearings support the gas generator:


a) 4
b) 2
c) 3

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 3

7 - The engine includes:


a) a hot section and a cold section
b) 5 modules
c) 4 modules.
8 - Type of oil system:
a) dry sump
b) constant pressure
c) lubrication by splashing.
9 - Setting of the oil filter pre-blockage indicator:
a) lower than the by-pass valve
b) higher than the by-pass valve
c) the same as the pump valve.
10 - The oil strainers are located:
a) at the outlet of the pumps
b) on the inlet of the scavenge pumps
c) at the inlet of the lubricated components.
11 - Is there a max. oil temperature:
a) yes, 60C
b) no
c) yes, 115C max.

Edition: April 2012

13.12

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

12 -
T he air tapped at the centrifugal wheel outlet
pressurises:
a) some labyrinth seals
b) the tank
c) the pumps.
13 - Position of the bleed valve during flight?
a) open
b) closed
c) depends on conditions.
14 - Ventilation of start injectors:
a) does not exist
b) is made with air from the compressor
c) is made with atmospheric pressure air.
15 - The injection centrifugal wheel is drained:
a) permanently
b) to enable the ventilation cycle
c) during engine shut-down.
16 - The max. speed of the gas generator is:
a) limited by a hydraulic stop
b) limited by a mechanical stop
c) not limited by the Fuel Control Unit.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

17 - The gap between the metering needle and the fork:


a) represents the instant flow step
b) varies with N1
c) provides a smoother acceleration.
18 - The fuel pump is:
a) vane type
b) gear type
c) centrifugal.
19 - The fuel system pressurising valve:
a) is electrically controlled
b) operates when overpressure occurs
c) gives priority to the start injectors.
20 - The starter is de-energised:
a) automatically
b) by air pressure
c) manually.
21 - The thermocouples are wired:
a) in series
b) in parallel
c) on the turbine casing.

Edition: April 2012

13.13

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 3 (continued)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

22 - The torque indicating system:


a) is hydraulic
b) is not used
c) is of phase displacement type.

28 - HE ignition means:
a) Hot Electrode
b) High Energy
c) High Emission.

23 - Number of thermocouple probes:


a) 3
b) 4
c) 5.

29 - Borescopic inspection is used to check:


a) the external parts condition
b) the condition of internal parts which are not accessible
without removal
c) the reduction gearbox condition.

24 - Oil pump pressure relief valve setting?


a) 300 kPa
b) 600 kPa
c) 800 kPa.

30 - The reliability of the engine is:


a) good
b) fairly good
c) extremely good.

4-b
9-a
14 - b
19 - c
24 - c
29 - b

5-a
10 - b
15 - c
20 - c
25 - b
30 - abc?

Answers

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

3-a
8-a
13 - c
18 - c
23 - a
28 - b

27 - Starting is possible with one igniter:


a) yes
b) no
c) yes, in emergency.

2-b
7-b
12 - a
17 - a
22 - a
27 - a

26 - The starter is supplied via a:


a) contactor
b) micro switch
c) transistor.

1-a
6-c
11 - c
16 - a
21 - b
26 - a

25 - Bleed valve position is transmitted by:


a) a pressure switch
b) a micro switch
c) an RVDT.

Edition: April 2012

13.14

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 3 (continued)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

This questionnaire is a sort of drill which is also used to test


and perfect the knowledge acquired.

2 - Name the reference stations:

1 - Complete this table (with values):


C

T1

T2

Max. Take-Off Power


CC

Compression ratio
Engine air flow

WF

N2 speed at 100%
N1 speed at 100%

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

0 - .....................................

3 - ....................................

1 - .....................................

4 - ....................................

2 - .....................................

5 - ....................................

Edition: April 2012

13.15

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 4

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

1 - .........................................................

2 - .............................................................

3 - .......................................................

4 - .........................................................

5 - .............................................................

6 - ......................................................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.16

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

3 - Engine - List the components on the diagram:

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

4 - Oil system - List the components:


AIRFRAME

ENGINE

1 - .........................................................

2 - .............................................................

3 - .......................................................

4 - .........................................................

5 - .............................................................

6 - ......................................................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.17

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

P0

P1'

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

5 - Complete the following table:

P2

Injector ventilation
Acceleration control unit
Bleed valve control pressure
Injection wheel pressurisation
Axial compressor bearing pressurisation
Gas generator rear bearing cooling
Power turbine bearing chamber labyrinth pressurisation
Gas generator turbine disc cooling

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.18

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

6 - Complete the legend of the compressor field diagram:

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

COMPRESSION
RATIO P2 / P0

A
B

AIR FLOW G

A - .........................................................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

B - .............................................................

Edition: April 2012

C - .......................................................

13.19

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

7 - Fuel system - Complete the legend:

5
6

1 - .....................................

2 - .....................................

3 - .....................................

4 - ..............................

5 - .....................................

6 - .....................................

7 - .....................................

8 - ..............................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.20

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

8 - Fuel system - List the components:


8

7
1

2
6

5
4

1 - .....................................

2 - .....................................

3 - .....................................

4 - ..............................

5 - .....................................

6 - .....................................

7 - .....................................

8 - ..............................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.21

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Engine stopped

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

9 - Fuel system - Complete the following table:

Engine in stabilised
flight

Fuel pump..................................................................
Pump pressure relief valve.........................................
Constant P valve .....................................................
Metering needle .........................................................
Start injector electro-valve..........................................
Overspeed electro-valve............................................
Pressurising valve......................................................
Main valve..................................................................
Combustion chamber drain valve...............................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.22

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1

10 - Control system - List the components:

1
2

P2

WF
5
+
N1

4
N1*

+
N2
+

N2*

1 - .........................................................

2 - .............................................................

3 - .......................................................

4 - .........................................................

5 - .............................................................

6 - ......................................................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.23

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Power turbine
speed N2
time

Load
TRQ

Fuel flow
WF

time

time
Gas generator
speed N1

time

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.24

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

11 - Complete the following graphs during a load TRQ increase:

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

ARRIEL 1
QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

12 - Drains - List the drains:

1 - .....................................

2 - .....................................

3 - .....................................

4 - ..............................

5 - .....................................

6 - .....................................

7 - .....................................

8 - ..............................

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.25

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

13 - Complete the following table:

Number of lifting points?

Type of fire detectors?

Number of drain points?

Air used for intake anti-icing?

Max. air tapping flow for aircraft use?

Loss of power due to aircraft tapping?

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.26

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

14 - Define of the following documents:

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Maintenance manual(s)

Spare parts catalogue

Tools catalogue

Service bulletins

Service letters

Engine log book

Flight manual

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.27

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

ARRIEL 1

Training Notes
1st line maintenance course

QUESTIONNAIRE 4 (continued)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

15 - Trouble shooting. Indicate the probable cause(s) of the following faults.


1 - On start selection, N increases but not
the gas temperature.
2 - On start selection, N and T4 increase
but not sufficiently to obtain start.
3 - Surge of the compressor.
4 - Max. power not obtained.
5 - On stop selection, the engine does not
completely shut-down.
6 - Incorrect speed of the helicopter rotor.
7 - Power turbine overspeed.
8 - Drop of oil pressure.
9 - Abnormal T4 temperature.
10 - N1 overspeed.

For training purposes only


Copyright - Turbomeca Training

Edition: April 2012

13.28

CHECKING OF KNOWLEDGE

of these training notes and (maybe also) of the course


but not the END of your training
which must be continued,
harmonizing knowledge and experience.
THANK YOU for your kind attention.
Au revoir
Goodbye
Adis
Auf Wiedersehen
Adeus
Arrivederci
Farvel
To t z i e n s
Adj
Nkemiin
Antio
Ma salaam
Selamat jalan
Adishatz
Ikus Arte

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

END

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Remarks (appreciations, criticisms, suggestions...) should be forwarded to:


TURBOMECA
CENTRE DINSTRUCTION
40220 TARNOS - FRANCE
REMARKS CONCERNING THE TRAINING AIDS

REMARKS CONCERNING THE TRAINING COURSE

Name.......................................................................................................................... .
Address..................................................................................................................... .
Course........................................................ from.........................to.......................... .
TURBOMECA Training Centre

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

REMARKS

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

Training information only delivered during a Turbomeca Training course and


not updated after the course (refer to the FOREWORD page)

You might also like